JP7464576B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines that allow players to play games.

There have been gaming machines with hold change effects in the past.

JP 2019-208919 A

For gaming machines that execute effects such as those described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the reserved change effects.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to improve the entertainment value of the hold change presentation.

A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display (variable display) and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The performance control means includes:
A specific display (a reserved display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means,
A specific effect (change effect) that suggests whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed depending on the display mode of the specific display,
The specific display includes a first aspect (normal aspect, blue aspect) of the specific display and a second aspect (red aspect, gold aspect) of the specific display having a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first aspect,
As the specific performance, there are a first specific performance (normal change performance) and a second specific performance (special change performance) in which the specific display of the second mode is displayed at a higher rate than the first specific performance,
The performance control means includes:
When the first specific performance is executed, a special performance sound composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect is not output from the sound output means before the first specific performance is executed (before the execution of the normal change performance, none of the performance sounds are reproduced and output),
When the second specific performance is executed, the special performance sound can be output from the sound output means before the second specific performance is executed (before the special change performance is executed, the scratch-processed performance sound EA is reproduced and output).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the output of the special effect sound can suggest that a second specific effect, which has a higher probability of being controlled to a favorable state than the first specific effect, will be executed, so the player can pay attention to whether or not the special effect sound will be output, increasing interest.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of the pachinko game machine 1 at characteristic portion 152F. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the small win is released. This is a flowchart showing the processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type table in feature section 05TM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table, and (B1), (B2-1), and (B2-2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table in normal mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table in rush mode. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a sound effect type table, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of output modes related to sound effects. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a graph relating to the impact of a sound. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a sound effect type table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a sound effect type table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of complementary color contrast. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a movable body. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game flow. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the presentation at the time of starting winning. An explanatory diagram showing a table referenced in the process of determining the presentation at the time of starting winning. An explanatory diagram showing a table referenced in the process of determining the presentation at the time of starting winning. An explanatory diagram showing a table referenced in the process of determining the presentation at the time of starting winning. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to normal change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to a change precursor presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to a special change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to a special change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to a special change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to a special change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect regarding a pre-reading preview presentation of a change precursor presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a presentation at the start of fluctuation. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a presentation at the start of fluctuation. An explanatory diagram showing a table referenced in the process of determining the performance at the start of fluctuation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the development flow of the SP reach performance. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a story SP development presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a story SP development presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a story SP development presentation. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to a CU presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern for the first normal time jackpot notification presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern for the first normal time jackpot notification presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern for the second normal time jackpot notification presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern for the second normal time jackpot notification presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern for the second normal time jackpot notification presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern for the second normal time jackpot notification presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern for the third normal time jackpot notification presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern for the third normal time jackpot notification presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern for the third normal time jackpot notification presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern for the third normal time jackpot notification presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to a revival presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to a revival presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to a revival presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to round display. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution timing of the V stock effect. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the presentation at the start of a jackpot. An explanatory diagram showing a table referenced in the process of determining the presentation at the start of a jackpot. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation format for the jackpot type notification presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode when the first V stock presentation is not executed during a jackpot. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot fanfare period. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot fanfare period. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when the first V stock is executed during the jackpot fanfare period. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern when the first V stock is executed during a jackpot round period. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern when the first V stock is executed during a jackpot round period. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern when the first V stock is executed during a jackpot round period. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern when the first V stock is executed during a jackpot round period. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the presentation at the end of a jackpot. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode when the rush mode presentation mode is selected. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a presentation when waiting for the start of a change. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining whether or not to execute the second V stock effect at the start of fluctuation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode when the second V stock presentation is not executed in the time-saving state. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern when the second V stock presentation is executed in the time-saving state. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding the round display after the V stock presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a time-saving entry presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a time-saving entry presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a time-saving entry presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the annihilation SP presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the output mode regarding the sound produced in the annihilation SP production. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode for a jackpot notification presentation when hitting the right button for the first time. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode for a special jackpot announcement presentation when hitting the ball to the right for the first time. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode for a jackpot notification presentation when hitting the ball to the right for the second time. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode for a special jackpot notification presentation when hitting the ball to the right for the second time. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode for a jackpot notification presentation when hitting the third right button. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode for a special jackpot announcement presentation when hitting to the third right. An explanatory diagram showing a playback output period table for the sound effect in the jackpot notification effect. 11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of a series of effects in this embodiment. 11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of a series of effects in this embodiment. 11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of a series of effects in this embodiment. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a series of presentations in this embodiment. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a series of presentations in this embodiment. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a series of presentations in this embodiment. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a series of presentations in this embodiment.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the play area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled vertically or updated) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display. In addition, a pending display corresponding to a variable display of a first special pattern whose execution is pending is referred to as a "first pending display," and a pending display corresponding to a variable display of a second special pattern whose execution is pending is referred to as a "second pending display." In addition, the first pending display and the second pending display are collectively referred to as "pending displays" as appropriate.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state is controlled based on the display result of the special symbol changing display being a "jackpot". However, the invention is not limited to this form, and the time-saving state may be controlled based on a trigger other than the display result of the special symbol changing display being a "jackpot".

For example, a "miss with time-saving" may be provided as a display result of the special pattern change display. When a miss with time-saving is displayed, the time-saving control is controlled to time-saving state B (e.g., chance time with 7 time-saving times) in which the time-saving control is performed a first predetermined number of times. Also, when 500 changes are performed in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, the time-saving control is controlled to time-saving state C (e.g., play time with 99 time-saving times) in which the time-saving control is performed a second predetermined number of times. However, even if 500 changes are performed again in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of time-saving state C, the time-saving control will not be performed again based on this.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the Presentation, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various presentations (presentations to inform the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The presentations are described below. The presentations are executed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the presentations may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
2, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the change of the special symbols will be resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described below.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, if a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, they also include one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 152F)
Next, the characteristic part 152F of this embodiment will be described. Regarding the characteristic part 152F, a technology targeted at a pachinko game machine capable of setting a setting value with different advantageous degrees for a player, such as a winning probability of a jackpot, by a setting means will be described as follows. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also functions as a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different advantageous degrees for a player as a setting value for the winning probability of a jackpot.

First, the setting values will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in this example is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed according to the setting values by a person at the gaming facility (such as a gaming facility staff member) using a predetermined operating means such as a switch to change the settings.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), a setting change process is executed that allows the winning probability of a jackpot set in the pachinko game machine 1 to be changed in response to a setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, a setting change process is executed that allows the winning probability of a jackpot to be changed by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value consists of six stages (multiple stages) from 1 to 6, for example, and the winning probability of a jackpot increases in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. In other words, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. Note that the setting value may be set in multiple stages and is not limited to six stages. In this way, by making it possible to change the probability of winning a jackpot, the payout rate (the number of balls paid per unit time (number of winning balls)) changes, so changing the setting value can also be said to change the payout rate.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 may be called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, may be called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

The probability of selecting a type of jackpot may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot.

In the feature section 152F, in a pachinko game machine that can set any one of a plurality of set values, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state, a reserved consecutive win may be executed in which reserved information determined to be controlled to a win (jackpot or small win) is stored in the RAM 122 as a reserved memory buffer. Specifically, a reserved consecutive win refers to a consecutive win (reserved consecutive wins) within a reserved information range in which there is reserved information that will be a win in the future among the reserved information that exists when a jackpot occurs, and the next win occurs consecutively within the reserved information that existed at the time of the jackpot occurrence after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, in the case of a small win, a jackpot via a small win is generated based on the occurrence of a V prize, so the reserved information of the small win can be said to be reserved memory information of a win that will be a jackpot in the future. When such a reserved consecutive win is executed, a notification effect that notifies the player that the reserved consecutive win is a reserved consecutive win may be executed.

Figure 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F, the reference symbols and explanations for the same configuration as in the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in Figure 1 are omitted, and only the different parts are explained.

In the game area where the game balls can flow down after being thrown, a first path of the game balls' flow paths is provided mainly in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path of the game balls' flow paths, which is different from the first path, is provided mainly in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may be called the left hit path. Also, the second path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may be called the right hit path.

The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play nails within the play area.

When a game ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area, if it is guided to the left game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area. Also, when a game ball is guided to the right game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A with a first start winning hole is provided as a structure into which a game ball hit into the left game area of the game area can enter. The winning ball device 6A is disposed below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first start winning hole switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start winning hole.

The passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the V-determination winning device 87 are provided as structures through which game balls that have been hit into the right playing area of the playing area can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second start winning port through which game balls can enter. In addition, as switches for detecting game balls that have entered each port, a gate switch 21 is provided inside the passing gate 41, a second start winning port switch 22B is provided inside the second start winning port, and a V-winning switch 87a, a V-determination winning switch 15a, and a V-determination discharge switch 15b are provided inside the V-determination winning device 87.

In the left play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the first start winning hole, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. In the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41 of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

The passing gate 41 is a gate structure through which the game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol changes and is displayed. The normal symbol will be described later. In the left game area, the game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the first start winning hole, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. In the right game area, the game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second start winning hole of the winning hole structure and the passing gate 41. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

The V-judging winning device 87 is a device for judging the V-winning of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a big win when a small win occurs.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent material, and the game ball passing through the inside can be seen. The V-judgment winning device 87 has a width in the front and back directions at the top that allows the game ball to pass through, and walls are provided on both sides (the front and back sides) of a passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left and right directions, and a guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed. In the center of the guide path, an operating port is formed as an opening that can allow a total of about 10 or more game balls to win during the specified open period by repeatedly opening and closing for a specified period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 opening periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + 1 second end period) when a small win occurs. In the passage of the game ball in the V-determination winning device 87, multiple protrusions are provided alternately on both sides of the wall as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball being guided, forming a structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in which the game ball flows slowly in the passage above the operating port at the top of the V-determination winning device 87 when hit from the right.

In the small win game state, the opening control of the V-determination winning device 87 is executed for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V-determination winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In the V-determination winning device 87, the portion of the induction path where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called the fixed portion 873. At a position where the operating port can be opened and closed, a movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move back and forth to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided along the guide path from the right end to the left end and falls from the left end. When the operating port is open due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens on the guide path, so that the game ball guided along the guide path can fall from the operating port into the inside of the V-determination winning device 87.

Inside the V-determination winning device 87 (operating port), a specific V winning area 870 is provided in the center of the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-determination winning device 87 as a winning area where game balls entering from the operating port can win, and further, a ramp is provided that guides all game balls that enter from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning port through which game balls can enter, and is capable of guiding game balls that enter from the V winning port downward.

At the top of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) is provided that can switch the V winning area 870 to either an open state or a closed state. The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. When the V winning opening is open due to the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the V winning opening is closed due to the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and is set up in a manner that opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870, and can fall into the winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V-judgment winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and in a small win game state in which the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open, when one game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V-winning switch 87a provided in the V-winning area 870. In a small win game state, when one game ball is detected by the V-winning switch 87a, the opening and closing member is controlled to a closed state, and game balls guided onto the V-winning area 870 thereafter enter the winning ball area. Game balls that enter the winning ball area are detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, of the game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87, one game ball is detected by the V-judgment winning switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V-winning switch 87a and the V-judgment winning switch 15a reaches 10, the V-judgment winning device 87, which is opened during a small win game state, closes its operating port and is placed in a state where game balls cannot enter. The V-winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge below, and game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage are discharged to a specified discharge path inside the game board 2. The discharge passage is provided with a V-judgment discharge switch 15b that can detect discharged game balls, and all discharged game balls are detected by this switch.

When a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, if a game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during a specified valid period, the conditions for a big win are met and the game is controlled to a big win game state. Such a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 is called a V-winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, as described above, during the period when a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, the structure and control are designed so that an average of about 10 game balls in total can enter the V-judgment winning device 87 without requiring any special operation, and further, the structure is designed so that when a game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the game ball always (100%) enters the V-winning area 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small win occurs, a right-hit promotion notification is executed to instruct the player to hit to the right so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V-determination winning device 87.

Therefore, when a small win occurs, unless the player does not shoot the game ball while the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is open, or the player hits with the left hand, if the player hits with the right hand, the game ball will always (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a big win will occur.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a game ball deceleration structure is provided in the V-determination winning device 87. However, instead of providing such a deceleration structure, an operating port that allows game balls to drop into a part of the game ball guide path in the V-determination winning device 87 may be provided, and the operating port may be opened 10 times to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V-winning area 870 during the small win game state.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determination winning device 87, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to have the potential to enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V-determined winning ball device 87, but from the standpoint of gameplay, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering either of them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the play area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, game balls hit to the right are guided by game nails planted in the right play area. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that game balls cannot enter from the left play area, depending on the state in which the game nails are planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening covered by a rectangular door on the front, and when a big win occurs, a solenoid causes the door to tilt forward around the base as an axis, revealing (opening) the large winning opening. A count switch 23 for detecting the game ball that has entered is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. The winning route to the special variable winning ball device 7 is restricted by game nails and other structures so that the game ball can enter the large winning opening only when the game ball is shot into the right game area. It is also possible to make it possible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening regardless of whether it is shot into the left game area or the right game area.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the special variable winning ball device 7 with the large winning opening and the V-judgment winning device 87 for judging a V-win are different devices, but this is not limited to the above, and the special variable winning ball device 7 with the large winning opening and the V-judgment winning device 87 for judging a V-win may be a common device.

For example, a V-judgment winning device 87 for judging a V-win may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 that has a large winning opening. In this case, the game ball that enters the large winning opening will enter the V-judgment winning device 87 as is.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. When a jackpot is determined by a lottery based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by a lottery based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A big win also occurs when a game ball that has entered the V-winning area 870 while the V-judgment winning device 87's operating port is open due to a small win game state. Hereinafter, a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 and being detected by the V-winning switch 87a is referred to as a V-winning. A small win is a win in which the V-judgment winning device 87's operating port opens as a predetermined value, and a big win can occur on the condition of a V-winning. In the V-judgment winning device 87, a game state in which the operating port opens is referred to as a "small win game state." A big win that occurs based on a game ball's V-winning in a small win game state is referred to as a "big win via a small win." In contrast, a big win game state that occurs based on the display result of the special pattern variable display by the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B is referred to as a "big win by special pattern."

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value is awarded, and a repeat continuation control is performed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats an open state and a closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning opening is open) is called a round. The repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, and then closed when a predetermined end condition for the open state is met (either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., 10) have been generated). When the open end condition is met, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times the device is opened in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (the final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started when the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition for the variable display, is met (for example, when the game ball passes through the first start winning port or the second start winning port as the start winning area (including winning)), and the start condition for the variable display is met (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being executed), and the display result (stopped symbol) is derived and displayed after the variable display time (change time) has elapsed. The game ball passing through means that the game ball has passed through an area that has been determined in advance as a winning area, such as a winning port or gate, and is a concept that includes the game ball entering the winning port (winning). The display result is derived and displayed means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed (determined display).

In addition, for variable displays where the game ball has entered a start area such as the first start winning port and the second start winning port but the start conditions have not yet been met, storing information about the variable displays where the start conditions have not yet been met within a specified upper limit number is called reserved memory. The term reserved memory is also used to indicate (specify) the reserved information. Reserved memory is also called start memory or start winning memory.

For the first special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the first reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start winning port. For the second special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the second reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second start winning port. If a jackpot occurs when such a first reserved memory or second reserved memory exists, the reserved memory that existed before the jackpot occurs is maintained as is, and is used for the variable display after the jackpot gaming state ends.

When a second start winning occurs at the second start winning slot, even if there is a reserved memory of a first start winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on that second start winning is executed with priority. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special 2 priority consumption" as appropriate).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which special 2 priority digestion was performed, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and special 2 priority digestion does not have to be performed.

For example, (A) the display of the first special pattern may be executed in priority over the display of the second special pattern (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "Special 1 priority consumption"); (B) the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern may be executed simultaneously (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "Special 1 and Special 2 simultaneous consumption").

Above the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, there is provided a second reserve display device 25B consisting of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning port, i.e., the second reserve memory number. The second reserve display device 25B increases the number of lit displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. And, each time a variable display is started on the second special pattern display device 4B, it decreases the number of lit displays by one.

Further above the second reserve display 25B, there is a first reserve display 25A consisting of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that entered the first start winning port, i.e., the first reserve memory number. The first reserve display 25A increases the number of lit displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. And, each time the variable display on the first special pattern display device 4A begins, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state and presentation state are controlled so that the player can enjoy a variety of games by shooting the game ball in either a "left hit" aimed at the left playing area or a "right hit" aimed at the right playing area depending on the game situation. The flow of the game after the player starts playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 is explained below.

When a player sits down at the pachinko game machine 1 and starts playing for the first time, he or she first plays by hitting the ball from the left so that the ball will enter the first start winning hole. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot with a special symbol), the player switches from hitting the ball from the left to hitting the ball from the right, and plays by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens. After the jackpot game state ends, a right-hit promotion notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, encouraging the player to play by hitting the ball from the right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot game state, the player plays a game in which the player hits the ball with the right hand to aim at the opened special variable winning ball device 7. During the jackpot game state, a right hand hit promotion notification is made. After the jackpot game state ends, if the game enters a time-saving state, which will be described later, the player continues to play by hitting the ball with the right hand. After the jackpot game ends, if the game enters a time-saving state, a time-saving notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state will begin if the game is in a time-saving state. In addition, during the time-saving state, a right hand hit promotion notification is also made. If the game does not enter a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, the game is played by switching from right hand hit to left hand hit so that the game ball will enter the first start winning hole as the right hand hit promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends. In addition, if the game does not enter a time-saving state, a left hand hit promotion notification (also called a left hand hit notification) may be made on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to play by returning to left hand hit.

During the time-saving state after the end of the big win game, the player plays by hitting the right hand to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second start winning port. If the game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result is a big win (a big win with a special pattern), the player continues to hit the right hand to aim at the special variable winning ball device 7. Also, if the game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result is a small win display result, the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is opened in the small win game state, so the player continues to hit the right hand to aim at the V-determination winning device 87. At the start of the small win game state, a small win start notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the small win game state has started. In addition, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, a right-hit promotion notification is also issued at a specific timing (depending on the game situation, at the start of the small win display that is executed before the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened in response to a small win, or at a specified timing before the small win display is executed).

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small win game state, a game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87, enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected, and a V-winning occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V-winning has occurred. In addition, when the small win game state ends, a small win end notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the small win ends, the game enters a big win game state and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, so the player continues playing by hitting with the right hand, aiming for the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, when playing a game aiming at the V-judgment winning device 87 in a small win game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big win does not occur. When a V winning does not occur during a small win game state like this, a V winning failure notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V winning has failed. In addition, at the end of the small win game state, a small win end notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small win game state, while the time-saving state continues, the player continues to play by aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B while still hitting from the right. When the time-saving state ends, the game is played by switching from hitting from the right to hitting from the left so that the game ball will win the first start winning hole. When the time-saving state ends, a time-saving end notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state has ended, and a left-hand hit promotion notification is displayed to encourage the player to return to left-hand play.

Figure 8-2 is a diagram showing a winning type table. The winning type table shows, for each winning type, the conditions for a winning jackpot to occur, the control state (game state) after the winning jackpot, the number of times the ball is opened during the winning jackpot (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round during the winning jackpot. In this embodiment, the winning types include a 15R time-saving winning jackpot, a 4R time-saving winning jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot. The number in parentheses for a winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 opens.

A small win occurs when a game ball enters the second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special pattern becomes a small winning pattern. The decision of whether or not to make the display result of the special pattern a small winning pattern is made in advance by random number lottery (special pattern small win decision). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operating hole of the V-determination winning device 87 opens in an opening pattern with 10 openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds. The game control state (big win probability, small win probability, base, described later) after the end of the small win game state is the same as before the small win. In a small win, prize balls are paid out for the game ball that entered the V winning area 870 in the V-determination winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small win game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the game ball is placed in the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 while the operating port is open, and the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (V-winning), a big win occurs. Such a big win via a small win is called a small win via big win. A small win via big win includes a 16 (15) R time-saving big win via a small win, a 9 (8) R time-saving big win via a small win, and a 5 (4) R time-saving big win via a small win, which have different numbers of rounds in the big win. A small win that is linked to be a 16 (15) R time-saving big win is called a first small win. A small win that is linked to be a 9 (8) R time-saving big win is called a second small win. A small win that is linked to be a 5 (4) R time-saving big win is called a third small win.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly from the variable display of a special symbol, without going through a small jackpot, is called a pattern jackpot. Pattern jackpots include the 15R pattern time-saving jackpot, which occurs directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and the 4R pattern time-saving jackpot.

In this way, jackpots include pattern jackpots that occur directly based on the varying display of the first or second special pattern, and small jackpots that occur by V entry via a small jackpot based on the varying display of the second special pattern. Each pattern jackpot and small jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. In this embodiment, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

The 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize entry port is opened 15 times (15R). The 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize entry port is opened 4 times (4R). The 16(15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-judgment entry device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize entry port is opened 15 times (15R) on the condition of a V entry. The entry device is opened for 16 rounds, but the number of times the large prize entry port is actually opened is 15 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large prize entry port is the same type of jackpot as the 15R time-saving jackpot. The 9(8)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-judgment entry device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize entry port is opened 8 times (8R) on the condition of a V entry. A 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determining winning device 87 opens once (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens four times (4R) on the condition that a V win is achieved. The winning device opens for five rounds, but the large winning hole is actually opened four times, and the player feels that the opening of the large winning hole is the same type of jackpot as a 4R time-saving jackpot.

The time-saving state after the 4R time-saving jackpot has two end conditions: one in which the second special symbol is displayed once, and the other in which the first and second special symbols are displayed five times in total. The number of times for the time-saving end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a 100% rate. When the second special symbol is displayed once, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set as the number of times that a jackpot via a small win may occur when the second special symbol is displayed once.

The number of times the second special symbol is displayed once as the time-saving end condition is set for the following reason. In the case of a 4R time-saving jackpot, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) is basically continued until the second special symbol is displayed once, but to display the second special symbol, it is necessary to hit the ball from the right to make the ball enter the passage gate 41 and open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, the ball must enter the variable winning ball device 6B. It may take time to make the ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, and the first special symbol that has been reserved and stored may be displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition of the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed five times is a condition for ensuring that one display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning of which up to four can be stored before the jackpot game state immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met. In this way, it is possible to prevent the display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, from not being executed in the time-saving state, due to the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

After a jackpot other than the 4R time-saving jackpot, two ending states are set: an ending condition in which the number of times the second special symbol changes is 7, and an ending condition in which the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change is 11. The number of times 7 for the ending condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition in which the number of times the second special symbol changes is 7 is set as the number of times when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, which significantly increases the possibility of a jackpot via a small win compared to the 4R time-saving jackpot. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and to increase the player's expectations for the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

The end condition of the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11 times, so that even if the display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning (up to four symbols can be stored) starts immediately after the start of the time-saving state before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met, the display of the seven times the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be reliably executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the number of times the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, changes in the time-saving state, from starting the display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is set so that winning can be made from the first path, so that the game ball flowing down the first path is more advantageous to the player in terms of starting winning than the game ball flowing down the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big win game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of winning at the time of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path. Also, in a specific state such as a small win game state, the V-determined winning device 87 that is opened is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of the occurrence of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path.

In addition to the above comparison of advantages, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning) are provided on the first and second paths, and in a low base state as the normal state, it is easier to win at the variable winning port via the first path than via the second path, and in other states such as a high base state, a big win game state, and a small win game state, it is easier to win at the variable winning port via the second path than via the first path, such that it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the first path in the normal state, and more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the second path in other game states.

Figure 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In Figure 8-3, the type of random number, update range, use, and addition conditions are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot will be generated and whether or not a small jackpot will be generated. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is updated by incrementing from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then is updated by incrementing from 0 again. (2) Random 1: Determines the type of jackpot (type, 15R time-saving jackpot, 4R time-saving jackpot, 16(15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, 9(8)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, and 5(4)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot) and the jackpot pattern (for jackpot type determination, for jackpot pattern determination). (3) Random 2: Determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for fluctuation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3: Determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for fluctuation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determines whether or not a jackpot based on a normal pattern will be generated (for normal pattern hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determines the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the specific game state jackpot includes multiple types, such as a 15R time-saving jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot. Therefore, when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R), or when a small jackpot is determined to be a small jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types based on the value of the random number for jackpot type determination (random 1). However, in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot, if a V prize does not occur, the determined jackpot is invalid. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot pattern is also determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot type determination (random 1). Therefore, random 1 is also a random number for determining the jackpot pattern. In addition, when the type of small win is decided, the small win symbol is also decided at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also the random number used to decide the small win symbol.

Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern is determined by first determining the fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and then determining one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3). In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation modes. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns are classified into normal fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that do not involve a reach, and reach fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that involve a reach.

Figure 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the first special chart hit determination table, the second special chart hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

Figure 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a hit for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a hit determination value that is compared with random R is set. The "probability" shown in Figure 8-4 (A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a hit.

The probability of winning the first special symbol varies depending on the setting value. At setting 1 it is 1/199, at setting 2 it is 1/190, at setting 3 it is 1/180, at setting 4 it is 1/170, at setting 5 it is 1/160, and at setting 6 it is 1/150. Therefore, the probability of winning is highest in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

Figure 8-4 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special symbol hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for making big hit and small hit determinations for the second special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with random R are set. The upper section in Figure 8-4 (B) is the big hit determination table section, and the lower section in Figure 8-4 (B) is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the upper section of Figure 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower section of Figure 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

The probability of a big win with the second special symbol varies depending on the setting value. It is 1/199 with setting 1, 1/190 with setting 2, 1/180 with setting 3, 1/170 with setting 4, 1/160 with setting 5, and 1/150 with setting 6. Therefore, the probability of a big win increases in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. In contrast, the probability of a small win with the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. A small win may be set for the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable to make the probability of a small win lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the probability of a small win with the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry port (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry port (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random R) of the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. For the first start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the first special symbol will be a jackpot. For the second start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the small jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small jackpot. Deciding to have a small hit also means provisionally deciding to have a big hit via a small hit (it is written as provisionally deciding because if no V win occurs during the small hit, it will not be controlled as a big hit).

Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to transition to a big win gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern a big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to transition to a small win gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the second special pattern a small win pattern.

Figures 8-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. Figure 8-4 (C) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special pattern. Figure 8-4 (D) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special pattern.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4(C) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, and has jackpot determination values corresponding to "15R pattern time-saving jackpot" and "4R pattern time-saving jackpot".The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4(D) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and has a jackpot determination value corresponding to "15R pattern time-saving jackpot".

Also, as shown in Figures 8-4 (C) and (D), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) that determines the jackpot patterns of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the judgment value corresponding to an "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3". The judgment value corresponding to a "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7".

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

In the small hit via jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4(E), a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination is set, which corresponds to each of "small hit via 16(15)R time-saving jackpot", "small hit via 9(8)R time-saving jackpot", and "small hit via 5(4)R time-saving jackpot". However, the jackpot type determined by the small hit via jackpot type determination table is a provisional jackpot type linked to each of the first small hit (16(15)R time-saving jackpot), the second small hit (9(8)R time-saving jackpot), and the third small hit (5(4)R time-saving jackpot), and is invalid unless a V win occurs during the small hit game state.

Figures 8-5 and 8-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of a presentation control command sent by the game control microcomputer 100. Figures 8-5 and 8-6 show the relationship between specific command data for the presentation control command and the command name and command specification. As shown in Figures 8-5 and 8-6, the game control microcomputer 100 sends various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 depending on the game control state.

The main commands in Figures 8-5 and 8-6 are explained below. Command 80XX (H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponds to a variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of multiple variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. In addition, the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives command 80XX (H), it controls the performance display device to start a performance that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C06(H) are display result specification commands that show display results including miss display results, jackpot type, jackpot display results for each small jackpot type, and small jackpot display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates that the display of the first special pattern change should begin. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates that the display of the second special pattern change should begin. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern determination designation command that specifies that the display of the first and second special patterns should end.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that specify the start of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening has been opened (closed) for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are jackpot end designation commands that specify the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command A402(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that specifies that the game state is normal (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is first time-saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is second time-saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved memory number specification command that specifies the first reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved memory number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved memory number specification command that specifies the second reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved memory number.

In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the number of reserved memories, it sends a reserved memory number designation command that specifies the number of reserved memories after subtraction, but this is not limited to this, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command that specifies that the number of reserved memories is to be subtracted by 1 for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may also be used.

Commands C2XX(H) and C3XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first or second starting winning port. Of these, command C2XX(H) is a designation command that indicates whether or not a winning is a jackpot, whether or not a small win is, and the type of jackpot judgment result, among the winning judgment results. In addition, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result (fluctuation pattern type judgment result) of which judgment value range the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls within, among the winning judgment results.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies the end of the first small win. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies the end of the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies the end of the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning specification command that specifies that a V winning has occurred. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection specification command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than a V winning ball) has been detected in the V determination winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, a first reserved memory buffer is provided in the RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the first reserved memory number (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved memory buffer. The first reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 3).

For the second special symbol, a second reserved memory buffer is provided in RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second reserved memory count (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved memory buffer. The second reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 3).

Based on a win at the first start winning port, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the first start winning port, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved memory buffer. Based on a win at the second start winning port, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the second start winning port, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserved memory buffer.

In this way, storing information about the start winning in the reserved memory buffer may be referred to as "reserved storage." Note that the random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) may be extracted when the special pattern begins to fluctuate, rather than being extracted at the time of the start winning and stored in advance in the reserved memory buffer.

Figure 8-7 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process executed as part of S101. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first start port switch 22A is on (S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first start port switch 22A is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the first reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the first reserved memory count counter for counting the first reserved memory count is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process that determines in advance at the time of the starting winning the result of the change display and the type of the change pattern when a change based on the starting winning of the detected first special pattern is subsequently executed (S1215).

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs at the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and various data obtained at the time of the start winning is stored as reserved memory information, and then the condition for starting the variable display is established, at the timing to start the variable display, in the normal special pattern processing (S110), a decision is made based on the reserved memory information regarding the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) that starts the variable display, as to whether the variable display result is a jackpot display result or not, and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set in response to the various random number values described above. Then, in the variable pattern setting processing (S111), the variable pattern (including the determination of the variable pattern type) is determined based on the variable pattern type determination value and the variable pattern determination value set in response to the various random number values described above.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the reserved memory information that stores various data obtained at the time of the start winning is read ahead at the timing before the variable display based on the start winning into the first start winning port or the second start winning port is started, specifically, at the timing when the game ball starts winning into the first start winning port or the second start winning port (the timing when the reserved memory information is stored), and based on the reserved memory information read ahead, a winning time performance process is executed in which a determination is made in advance as to whether or not it will be a jackpot, whether or not it will be a small jackpot, the type of jackpot, and the type of variation pattern are determined based on the jackpot determination value, jackpot type determination value, and variation pattern type determination value set in response to the various random number values described above. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 can predict the result of the variable display before the variable display of the performance pattern is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of the start winning, it is possible to execute a pre-reading performance such as a pre-reading notice that warns of a jackpot (possibility of a jackpot) during the variable display of the performance pattern.

Then, based on the result of the winning performance process, the CPU 103 controls the sending of a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216) and the sending of a variable type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1217). The CPU 103 also controls the sending of a first start winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1218), and also controls the sending of a first reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 by setting the value of the first reserved memory number counter to EXT data (S1219).

By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control CPU 120 each time a start winning occurs in the first start winning port.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of S1216 to S1219, when a start winning occurs in the first start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a first start winning designation command, and a first reserved memory number designation command, is sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second start port switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second start port switch 22B is not on, the process ends. If the second start port switch 22B is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter for counting the second reserved memory count is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process ends.

If the second reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process similar to the winning performance process described in S1215 for the start winning of the detected second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 controls the sending of a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the judgment result of the winning performance process (S1226), and controls the sending of a variable type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). The CPU 103 also controls the sending of a second starting winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1228), and controls the sending of a second reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 by setting the value of the second reserved memory number counter to EXT data (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control CPU 120 every time a start winning occurs in the second start winning port.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of S1226 to S1229, when a start winning occurs in the second start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a second start winning designation command, and a second reserved memory number designation command, are sent together within one timer interrupt.

Figure 8-8 is a flow chart showing the normal special symbol processing (S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (S51). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, the processing ends.

If there is no reserved memory data in the reserved memory buffer in S51, the process ends after performing a process (S80) for sending a customer waiting demo designation command. On the other hand, if there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer (S52). If there is reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is set to data indicating "second" (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer is set to data indicating "first" (S53).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern and the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of S52 to S54, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special pattern display device 4B based on the data of the second reserved memory is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special pattern display device 4A based on the data of the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and erases the contents of the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. Also, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4.

The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120, based on the value of the reserved memory number counter pointed to by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (S59). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the normal special symbol processing, first, data indicating "first" indicating that processing is to be performed on the first start winning slot, i.e., data indicating "first" indicating that processing is to be performed on the first special symbol, or data indicating "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second start winning slot, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second special symbol, is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing is performed according to the data set in the special symbol pointer. Thus, it is possible to make it common to the cases where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passing process or S1224 of the start port switch passing process and stored in the reserved memory buffer or random number buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or small jackpot determination value with the random number for determining a jackpot, and if they match, determines that a jackpot or small jackpot has occurred. In other words, it is a program that executes a process for determining a jackpot or a small jackpot.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8-4(A), or if the second special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8-4(B), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined that there is a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not there is a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also determining whether or not to treat the stopped symbol on the special symbol display as a jackpot symbol.

If it is determined in S61 that a jackpot has occurred (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1st" (S72). If the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1st", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (C) is selected (S73) and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer is not pointing to "1st" (if it is pointing to "2nd"), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (D) is selected (S74) and the process proceeds to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the random number (RANDOM 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

In addition, if the value of the random number for determining a big win (Random R) does not match any of the big win determination values in S61 (N in S61), it is checked whether the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second" to check whether the target of the big win determination is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 described later. On the other hand, if the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (the variable display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 8-4 (B) is used to determine whether the value of the random number for determining a big win (Random R) matches any of the small win determination values, thereby performing the small win determination process (S77). In other words, if the value of the random number (random R) for determining a big win matches any of the small win determination values shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is decided that a small win will occur for the second special symbol. Then, if it is decided that a small win will occur (Y in S77), a small win flag indicating a small win will be set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, the small hit via big hit type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (E) is selected (S79), and the big hit type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (RANDOM 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the type of big hit via small hit (S80). Then, proceed to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the random number (RANDOM R) for small hit determination does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), proceed to S82 described below.

In S81, data indicating the type of the jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, if the jackpot type is a "15R time-saving jackpot with a pattern", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and if the jackpot type is a "4R time-saving jackpot with a pattern", "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a "16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer separate from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, the provisional jackpot type buffer is set to "05" as data indicating the jackpot type. Of these, data indicating a 16 (15) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, a 9 (8) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, and a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot are provisionally set as they are invalid data that will not result in a jackpot if no V win occurs during a small jackpot game state.

In S82, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, if neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set to "-", which is a miss symbol. If the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be one of the small win symbols "1", "5", or "9" according to the small win type selected and determined in S80. If the big win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be one of the big win symbols "3" or "7" according to the big win type selected and determined in S75. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

Figure 8-9 is a flow chart showing the small win opening pre-processing (S118). In the small win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the opening mode of the small win, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small win start designation command indicating that the small win game state is to start to the performance control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets the V-judgment winning number counter as a counting means to use the number of winnings in the V-winning area 870 in the small win opening state as the end condition of the opening state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" and the setting is made to count down the number of V-winnings. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release process (S119) (S414).

Figure 8-10 is a flow chart showing the small win opening process (S119) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening process, the CPU 103 updates the small win opening control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, in S435 described later, it is confirmed whether the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter that counts the number of V winning balls is "0" (S431). The V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" by S413 in Figure 8-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". If the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether the small win opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

If the small win opening control timer has timed out in S432, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the small win opening control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled in accordance with the count value of the small win opening control timer based on the opening mode of the small win to operate the movable part 872 to an open state, and processing is performed to open and close the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether a V winning has been detected by a game ball entering the V winning area 870, which is in an open state inside the V determination winning device 87, it is determined whether the V winning switch 87a is in an on state (S434). When it is in an on state in S434, it means that a V winning has been detected, and a V winning flag, which is set when a V winning is detected, is set (S435). Then, a process is performed to transmit a V winning ball detection designation command (S436). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of V winnings. Next, the solenoid is driven to operate the opening and closing member, changing the V winning port of the V winning area 870 from an open state to a closed state (S437), and proceeding to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-determination winning device 87 enters the V-winning hole of the V-winning area 870 is closed, and all game balls that enter the V-determination winning device 87 thereafter are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V-determination winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, if the switch is not on in S434, it means that a V win has not been detected, and it is determined whether the V-judging win switch 15a is on (S438). If the switch is on in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and if the switch is not on in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball number counter, which was set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 8-9, is counted down by "-1" (S439), and a process is performed to send a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command (S440). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V-judgment winning ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 has been detected after the V-judgment winning ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of game balls that have entered the V-judgment winning device 87.

When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S431, the small win opening end condition is met because the number of V-winnings of the small win has reached the upper limit value, and when the small win opening control timer times out in S432, the small win opening end condition is met because the small win opening control has ended. In these cases, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable part 872 to a closed state and closes the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the opening mode of the small win, the V-judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed according to the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter. When the small win opening control timer times out, the V-judgment winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the opening control of the small win in the opening mode of the small win.

Next, data corresponding to the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning after the V determination winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win end processing (S120) (S443), and the processing is terminated. This starts the timing of the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning after the V determination winning device 87 is closed. Note that since the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning is set in this way, the game ball can be detected even if it passes through the V winning area later than the time it normally passes through. In addition, since the specific period is set, even if someone tries to illegally win a prize in the V winning area, only that period is detected, so that fraud can also be prevented.

Figure 8-11 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing (S120) in the special symbol process processing. In the small win end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V winning validity period timer by subtracting 1 (S441) and checks whether the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when a V winning has already been detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 87a is in the on state in order to determine whether or not a V winning has been detected, which occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 during the V winning validity period (S444). If it is not in the on state in S444, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is in the on state in S444, it is when a V winning has been detected during the V winning validity period, and the V winning flag indicating that a V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, a process is performed to transmit a V winning designation command (S446), and the process is terminated. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning has occurred.

When the V winning validity period timer has timed out in S442, processing is performed to send a small win end command (S447). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that the small win has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening and closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning port) to an open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that a big win has occurred, and the big win flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small win game state, if you hit to the right in response to the right hit promotion notification described below, you can make the game ball enter the V-determination winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the game ball that enters the V-determination winning device 87 will always V-enter the V-winning area 870, and the V-winning flag will be set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in Figure 8-10). Based on this, the big win flag is set in S449, and the game is controlled to the big win game state.

Next, the CPU 103 formally stores the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small jackpot stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the determination that a proper jackpot has occurred due to the occurrence of a V win (S450). Then, the time-saving flag that was set at that time is temporarily reset (S451).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 command, a jackpot start 4 command, or a jackpot start 5 command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a jackpot game state is about to start. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (S453).

The jackpot opening pattern data stored in ROM 101 is also referenced, and opening pattern data indicating the opening mode, such as the number of openings (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and interval time (time for closing the large prize opening between rounds), depending on the type of jackpot, is set in a predetermined memory area formed in RAM 102 (S454). Of this data, the data on the number of openings is set in an opening counter for counting the number of openings. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V win occurs in the small jackpot game state, the game state transitions to the jackpot game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big win game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big win type via small win stored in the temporary big win type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, if a V winning does not occur in the small win game state, the game does not transition to the big win game state.

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 05TM]
Next, the feature part 05TM will be described with reference to Figs. 9-1 to 9-83. In this embodiment, when a performance (such as a story SP development performance) that suggests that the variable display has a high expectation of a jackpot, or a performance (such as the first to third normal time jackpot notification performance) that notifies the player that the display result of the variable display is a jackpot is executed during the variable display, a part of the performance sound is specially processed (scratch processed) and played back from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, when a performance (first reserved consecutive performance) that notifies the player that the display result is a "hit"("jackpot" or "small hit") in the reserved memory during a jackpot game, or a performance (first next confirmed performance) that notifies the player that the jackpot type of the jackpot is a next confirmed jackpot is executed, a part of the performance sound is specially processed (scratch processed) and played back from the speakers 8L and 8R.

[Jackpot type table]
FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing a jackpot type table. In the jackpot type table, for each type of jackpot, the jackpot occurrence conditions, the control state (game state) after the jackpot, the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot, and the opening time of each round in the jackpot are shown. In this embodiment, the jackpot types are a 10R time-saving jackpot, a 3R time-saving jackpot, a 10(9)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, and a 3(2)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot. The number in parentheses for the jackpot via a small jackpot indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole) opens.

A small win occurs when a game ball wins in the second start winning port provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special pattern becomes a small winning pattern. The decision of whether or not to make the display result of the special pattern a small winning pattern is made in advance by random number lottery (special pattern small win decision). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 opens in an opening pattern with 10 openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds. The game control state (big win probability, small win probability, base) after the end of the small win game state is the same as before the small win. In a small win, prize balls are paid out for the game ball that won the V winning area 870 in the V-determination winning device 87 during the small win game state. It is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated during the small win game state, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 (hereinafter referred to as the "V winning port") is open, if a game ball is allowed to enter the operating port and enters the V-winning area 870 inside the V-determination winning device 87 (V winning), a jackpot will occur. Such a jackpot that occurs via a small win is called a jackpot via a small win. Jackpots via a small win include a "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via a small win" and a "3 (2) R time-saving jackpot via a small win".

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly from the changing display of a special symbol, without going through a small jackpot, is called a pattern jackpot. Pattern jackpots include the "Pattern 3R Time-Shortened Jackpot" and the "Pattern 10R Time-Shortened Jackpot", which occur directly based on the changing display of the first or second special symbol.

In this way, jackpots include pattern jackpots that occur directly based on the changing display of the first or second special pattern, and small jackpots that occur by winning a V via a small jackpot based on the changing display of the second special pattern.

In this embodiment, the advantageous state that is favorable to the player also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7. Hereinafter, the "3R time-saving jackpot" and the "3 (2) time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" will be referred to as "3R jackpot" as appropriate, and the "10R time-saving jackpot" and the "10 (9) time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" will be referred to as "10R jackpot" as appropriate.

The "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 10 times (10R). In addition, the 10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determining winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize opening is opened 9 times (9R) on the condition of a V winning. Although the large prize opening is opened 9 times, the winning device is actually opened for 10 rounds, so the player feels that the opening of the large prize opening is the same type of jackpot as the "10R time-saving jackpot".

The "3R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened three times (3R). In addition, the 3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determining winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize opening is opened twice (2R) on the condition of a V winning. Although the large prize opening is opened twice, the winning device is actually opened for three rounds, so the player feels that the opening of the large prize opening is the same type of jackpot as the "3R time-saving jackpot".

The time-saving state after the "Pattern 3R Time-saving Big Hit" has two end conditions: one where the number of times the second special symbol changes is 1, and another where the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change is 5 (not shown). The number of times for the time-saving end condition where the number of times the second special symbol changes is 1 is set considering that the game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. When the second special symbol changes, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition where the number of times the second special symbol changes is 1 is set as the number of times that a big win via a small win may occur when the second special symbol changes.

The number of times the second special symbol is displayed once as the time-saving end condition is set for the following reason. In the case of a "3R symbol time-saving jackpot", the time-saving state (including the electric support state) is basically continued until the second special symbol is displayed once, but to display the second special symbol, it is necessary to hit the ball from the right to make the ball enter the passage gate 41 and open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, the ball must enter the variable winning ball device 6B. It may take time to make the ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, and the first special symbol that has been reserved may be displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition of the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed five times is a condition for ensuring that one display of the second special symbol, which is likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning of which a maximum of four can be stored before the jackpot game state immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met. In this way, it is possible to prevent the display of the second special symbol, which is likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, from not being displayed in the time-saving state, due to the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

In addition, after the jackpot of the "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" and part of the "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot", two end states are set: an end condition that the number of times the second special pattern is displayed is 99 times, and an end condition (not shown) that the total number of times the first special pattern and the second special pattern are displayed is 103 times. The number of times of 99 times as the end condition of the time-saving state is set considering that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special pattern, a small jackpot occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition of the number of times of 99 times of the variable display of the second special pattern is a state in which the next jackpot via a small jackpot is substantially confirmed when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, and is set to a number of times that significantly increases the possibility of generating a jackpot via a small jackpot compared to the "3R pattern time-saving jackpot". This allows players to focus on the occurrence of a big win via a small win, and also increases the player's sense of anticipation regarding the occurrence of a big win via a small win.

The end condition of the total number of times the first and second special symbols have been displayed is 103 times, for the same reason as in the case of the "Pattern 3R Time-Shortened Jackpot". This is to ensure that the display of the 99 changes in the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol starts due to reserved memory based on the first start winning (up to four can be stored) before the jackpot game state begins and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

In addition, after a jackpot of a 10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot and a 3 (2) R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, two end states are set: an end condition in which the number of times the second special symbol changes is 7, and an end condition (not shown) in which the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change is 11. The number of times 7 for the end condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small jackpot occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition in which the number of times the second special symbol changes is 7 is set as a number that significantly increases the possibility of generating a jackpot via a small jackpot when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, although it is not a state in which the next jackpot via a small jackpot is actually confirmed, compared to the "pattern 3R time-saving jackpot". This allows players to focus on the occurrence of a big win via a small win, and also increases the player's sense of anticipation regarding the occurrence of a big win via a small win.

The end condition of the total number of times the first and second special symbols are displayed is 11 times, for the same reason as in the case of the 3R time-saving jackpot. This is to ensure that the display of the seven changes in the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol is started due to reserved memory based on the first start winning (up to four can be stored) before the jackpot game state begins and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

[Random value]
9-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-2, in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big win type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted.

Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters and updated by software, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the gaming control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the gaming control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are set to the ranges shown in FIG. 9-2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other ranges of values may be used for the random numbers MR1 to MR5.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, making it possible to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variable pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variable patterns that become the variable display mode of each pattern in the variable display of special patterns, normal patterns, etc.

[Display result judgment table]
9-3 (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol and a display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 9-3 (A1) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "display result determination table [for first special symbol]" where appropriate). The display result determination table [for first special symbol] is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value (not shown) is set that is compared with the random number value MR1. The "probability" shown in Figure 9-3 (A1) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot. In this example, the jackpot probability for the first special symbol is 1/199.

Figure 9-3 (A2) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result judgment table for the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "display result judgment table [for second special symbol]" where appropriate). The display result judgment table [for second special symbol] is a data table for making big hit and small hit judgments for the second special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit judgment value and a small hit judgment value (not shown) are set to be compared with the random number value MR1. In Figure 9-3 (A2), the upper row is the big hit judgment table section, and the lower row is the small hit judgment table section. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

In this example, the probability of a big win with the second special symbol is 1/199. The probability of a small win with the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35. A small win may also be set for the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable to set the probability of a small win with the first special symbol lower than that with the second special symbol. For example, the probability of a small win with the first special symbol may be set to 1/99.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry port (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry port (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random number value MR1) of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined timing. For the first start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the display result determination table for the first special symbol, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the first special symbol will be a jackpot. For the second start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the display result determination table for the second special symbol, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small jackpot determination value set in the display result determination table for the second special symbol, and if the extracted value matches any of the small jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small jackpot. Deciding to have a small hit also means provisionally deciding to have a big hit via a small hit (it is written as provisionally deciding because if no V win occurs during the small hit, it will not be controlled as a big hit).

Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to transition to a big win gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern a big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to transition to a small win gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the second special pattern a small win pattern.

[Big hit type determination table]
9-3(B1), (B2-1), and (B2-2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 9-3(B1) is a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the pattern jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 9-3(B2-1) is a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the pattern jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 9-3(B2-2) is a small jackpot via jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the small jackpot via jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a small jackpot.

The jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol in Figure 9-3 (B1) (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol") contains a value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and jackpot determination values corresponding to a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" and a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" are set.

Figure 9-3 (B1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after each jackpot corresponding to a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" and a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot." The number of time-saving controls for a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" is 99, while the number of time-saving controls for a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" is 1.

In this embodiment, the "10R time-saving jackpot" and "10(9) time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" with 99 time-saving controls are appropriately referred to as "10R jackpot A" (next confirmed jackpot), the "10R time-saving jackpot" and "10(9) time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" with 1 or 7 time-saving controls are appropriately referred to as "10R jackpot B" (next non-confirmed jackpot), and the "3R time-saving jackpot" and "3(2) time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" with 1 or 7 time-saving controls are appropriately referred to as "3R jackpot B" (next non-confirmed jackpot). Hereinafter, a "jackpot" with X time-saving controls is appropriately referred to as "jackpot" (X times).

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 2 are assigned to a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" (99 times) (1%), and 3 to 299 are assigned to a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" (1 time) (99%).

The jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in Figure 9-3 (B2-1) (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot type determination table for the [second special symbol]") contains a value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and jackpot determination values corresponding to the "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" and the "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" are set.

Figure 9-3 (B2-1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after each jackpot corresponding to a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" and a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot." The number of time-saving controls for a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" is 99 or 7, while the number of time-saving controls for a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" is 7.

In this example, in the jackpot type judgment table for the [second special symbol], of the MR2 judgment value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 29 are assigned to "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" (99 times) (10%), 30 to 149 are assigned to "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" (7 times) (40%), and 150 to 299 are assigned to "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" (7 times) (50%).

The small win via jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in Figure 9-3 (B2-2) (hereinafter referred to as the "small win via jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol") contains a value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the small win via jackpot type, and jackpot determination values corresponding to "small win via 10 (9) R time-saving jackpot" and "small win via 3 (2) R time-saving jackpot" are set.

Figure 9-3 (B2-2) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot corresponding to the "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" and the "3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot." The number of time-saving controls for the "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is 99 or 7, while the number of time-saving controls for the "3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is 7.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] small win via jackpot type judgment table, of the MR2 judgment value range 0-299, 0-29 is assigned to "small win via 10 (9) R time-saving jackpot" (99 times) (10%), 30-149 is assigned to "small win via 10 (9) R time-saving jackpot" (7 times) (40%), and 150-299 is assigned to "small win via 3 (2) R time-saving jackpot" (7 times) (50%).

[Fluctuation pattern determination]
ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the multiple types of fluctuation patterns described above depending on the pre-determination result.

Here, we will explain the fluctuation pattern determination when the presentation mode is the normal mode and when the presentation mode is the powerful RUSH mode (see Figure 9-12 for details about the presentation modes). Specifically, two fluctuation pattern determination tables are prepared in advance: a fluctuation pattern determination table for "miss" that is used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is a "miss," and a fluctuation pattern determination table for "jackpot" that is used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is a "jackpot" (including a small win).

<Normal mode fluctuation pattern>
In the fluctuation pattern determination table [for misses] when the presentation mode is the normal mode, predetermined random number values within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take are assigned as judgment values for the fluctuation pattern of a "non-reach miss", a "normal reach miss", a "SP-A miss", a "SP-B miss", and a "SP-C miss".

[For jackpots] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a determination value for the fluctuation pattern of a "normal reach jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of an "SP-A1 jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of an "SP-A2 jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of an "SP-B1 jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of an "SP-B2 jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of an "SP-C1 jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern of an "SP-C2 jackpot".

＜Not within reach＞
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern of "non-reach miss" among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "miss", the reach state is not established and the final display result is notified as a "miss".

<Normal reach miss>
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern of "normal reach miss" among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "miss", after the reach state is established, a combination of decorative symbols (e.g., "323", "545", etc.) corresponding to the display result being a "miss" is displayed at a predetermined trigger (operation of push button 31B, passage of a predetermined period of time, etc.), thereby notifying the user that the final display result is a "miss".

<Normal reach jackpot>
In this embodiment, in the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "jackpot", after the reach state is established, a combination of decorative symbols (e.g., "222", "777", etc.) corresponding to the display result being a "jackpot" is displayed at a predetermined trigger (operation of push button 31B, passage of a predetermined period of time, etc.), thereby notifying the player that the final display result is a "jackpot" or "minor jackpot".

In this embodiment, multiple types of characters appear in various performances. In this example, these characters include ally character A, ally character B, ally character C, enemy character X, and enemy character Y. In the following, ally character A will be referred to as "ally character A", "ally A", "character A", "character A", "ally character (A)", "ally (A)", "character (A)", or "character (A)" as appropriate. In addition, in the following, ally character B will be referred to as "ally character B", "ally B", "character B", "character B", "ally character (B)", "ally (B)", "character (B)", or "character (B)". In the following, ally character C will be referred to as "ally character C", "ally C", "character C", "character C", "ally character (C)", "ally (C)", "character (C)", or "character (C)". Furthermore, hereinafter, enemy character X will be referred to as "enemy character X", "enemy X", "character X", "character X", "enemy character (X)", "enemy (X)", "character (X)", or "character (X)" as appropriate. Furthermore, hereinafter, enemy character Y will be referred to as "enemy character Y", "enemy Y", "character Y", "character Y", "enemy character (Y)", "enemy (Y)", "character (Y)", or "character (Y)" as appropriate.

＜Super reach with miss/jackpot＞
In this embodiment, in a fluctuation pattern involving a super reach ("SP-A miss", "SP-B miss", "SP-C miss", "SP-A1 jackpot", "SP-A2 jackpot", "SP-B1 jackpot", "SP-B2 jackpot", "SP-C1 jackpot", "SP-C2 jackpot"), the final display result is confirmed and stopped by executing a super reach effect (hereinafter referred to as an "SP reach effect" or "SP reach" as appropriate) that notifies whether or not a "jackpot" has been won.

(Challenge Special Production)
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns with super reach, in the variation patterns of "SP-A Miss", "SP-A1 Big Hit", and "SP-A2 Big Hit", after the reach state is established, a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the variation display result will be "Miss" is temporarily displayed (provisional miss notification), and then it develops into a super reach, and a super reach performance (hereinafter referred to as "Challenge SP Performance" or "Challenge SP" as appropriate) is executed to notify whether or not the ally character B has won the big hit by challenging to destroy a rock (in this example, "Nana Challenge", see FIG. 9-27 (3)). Hereinafter, such a variation pattern will be referred to as "variation pattern with "SP-A", "variation pattern with Challenge SP", etc. as appropriate.

Here, if the fluctuation pattern is "SP-A miss", an effect in which ally character B fails the challenge (failure effect) is executed, and it is announced that the final display result will be "miss". On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is "SP-A1 jackpot", an effect in which ally character B succeeds in the challenge (success effect) is executed (see Figures 9-32 and 9-33), and it is announced that the final display result will be "jackpot". Also, if the fluctuation pattern is "SP-A2 jackpot", after a failure effect is executed in the challenge SP effect, a revival effect, which will be described later, is executed, and it is announced that the final display result will be "jackpot".

(Battle special performance)
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns accompanying the super reach, in the variation patterns of "SP-B miss", "SP-B1 jackpot", and "SP-B2 jackpot", after the reach state is established, it develops into a super reach, and a super reach effect (hereinafter referred to as "battle SP effect" or "battle SP" as appropriate) is executed to notify whether or not a "jackpot" has been won by battling ally character A and enemy character X (see Figure 9-27 (6)).

Here, if the fluctuation pattern is "SP-B miss", an effect (defeat effect) in which ally character A is defeated by enemy character X is executed, and it is announced that the final display result will be "miss". On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is "SP-B1 jackpot", an effect (victory effect) in which ally character A wins over enemy character X is executed (see Figures 9-34 to 9-37), and it is announced that the final display result will be "jackpot". Also, if the fluctuation pattern is "SP-B2 jackpot", after a defeat effect is executed in the battle SP effect, a revival effect described below is executed, and it is announced that the final display result will be "jackpot". Hereinafter, such a fluctuation pattern will be appropriately referred to as "fluctuation pattern with "SP-B", "fluctuation pattern with battle SP", etc.

(Story Special Production)
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns involving super reach, in the variation patterns of "SP-C miss,""SP-C1jackpot," and "SP-C2 jackpot," after the reach state is established, it develops into a super reach, and a super reach performance (hereinafter referred to as "story SP performance" or "story SP" as appropriate) is executed to notify whether or not a "jackpot" has been won by displaying a story video related to ally character A (see Figure 9-27 (8)).

Here, if the variation pattern is "SP-C Miss", an effect (non-achievement effect) is executed in which the display of the story video related to ally character A is terminated halfway, and a notification is issued that the final display result will be "miss". On the other hand, if the variation pattern is "SP-C1 Big Hit", an effect (achievement effect) is executed in which the display of the story video related to ally character A is completed (see Figures 9-38 to 9-41), and a notification is issued that the final display result will be "Big Hit". Also, if the variation pattern is "SP-C2 Big Hit", after an non-achievement effect is executed in the story SP effect, a revival effect described below is executed, and a notification is issued that the final display result will be "Big Hit". Hereinafter, such variation patterns will be referred to as "variation patterns with "SP-C", "variation patterns with story SP", etc., as appropriate.

Figure 9-4 is a fluctuation pattern determination table in normal mode. As shown in Figure 9-4 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [misses] in normal mode, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 900 are assigned to each fluctuation pattern as "non-reach miss", 901 to 950 are assigned to "normal reach miss", 951 to 970 are assigned to "SP-A miss", 971 to 990 are assigned to "SP-B miss", and 991 to 997 are assigned to "SP-C miss".

Also, as shown in Figure 9-4 (B), in the normal mode [jackpot] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 50 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot", 51 to 185 to the "SP-A1 jackpot", 186 to 200 to the "SP-A2 jackpot", 201 to 470 to the "SP-B1 jackpot", 471 to 500 to the "SP-B2 jackpot", 501 to 950 to the "SP-C1 jackpot", and 951 to 997 to the "SP-C2 jackpot".

As shown in Figure 9-4, when the display result is "miss", among the fluctuation patterns with super reaches, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with "SP-A" (in this example, "SP-A miss") is selected is (970-951+1)/997 = approximately 2%, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with "SP-B" (in this example, "SP-B miss") is selected is (990-971+1)/997 = approximately 2%, and the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with "SP-C" (in this example, "SP-C miss") is selected is (997-991+1)/997 = approximately 0.7%.

On the other hand, when the display result is "jackpot", the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with "SP-A" (in this example, "SP-A1 jackpot", "SP-A2 jackpot") is selected among fluctuation patterns with super reach is {(185-51+1)+(200-186+1)}/997 = approx. 15%, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with "SP-B" (in this example, "SP-B1 jackpot", "SP-B2 jackpot") is selected is {(470-201+1)+(500-471+1)}/997 = approx. 30%, and the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with "SP-C" (in this example, "SP-C1 jackpot", "SP-C2 jackpot") is selected is {(950-501+1)+(997-951+1)}/997 = approx. 50%.

In this way, when the display result is "miss", among the fluctuation patterns with super reaches, the execution rate is allocated in the following relationship: fluctuation patterns with "SP-C" (about 0.7%) < fluctuation patterns with "SP-B" (about 2%) = fluctuation patterns with "SP-A" (about 2%). Also, when the display result is "jackpot", among the fluctuation patterns with super reaches, the execution rate is allocated in the following relationship: fluctuation patterns with "SP-A" (about 15%) < fluctuation patterns with "SP-B" (about 30%) < fluctuation patterns with "SP-C" (about 50%).

In other words, when a fluctuation pattern involving various super reaches is executed, the ratio of "miss" to "jackpot" (jackpot occurrence rate = jackpot / (miss + jackpot)) is 2(%):15(%) = 1:7.5 (88%) when a fluctuation pattern involving "SP-A" is executed, 2(%):30(%) = 1:15 (93%) when a fluctuation pattern involving "SP-B" is executed, and 0.7(%):50(%) = 1:70 (98%) when a fluctuation pattern involving "SP-C" is executed.

Therefore, when fluctuation patterns accompanied by various super reaches are executed, the probability of a jackpot occurring is higher in the following relationship: fluctuation pattern accompanied by "SP-A" < fluctuation pattern accompanied by "SP-B" < fluctuation pattern accompanied by "SP-C". In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher in the following relationship: fluctuation pattern accompanied by Battle SP < fluctuation pattern accompanied by Challenge SP < fluctuation pattern accompanied by Story SP.

<Powerful RUSH mode fluctuation pattern>
In the fluctuation pattern determination table [for misses] when the presentation mode is the Powerful RUSH mode, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value for the fluctuation pattern of a "non-reach miss", a "normal reach miss", an "SP-X miss", and an "SP-Y miss".

[For jackpots] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a determination value for the fluctuation pattern of a "normal reach jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of an "SP-X jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern of an "SP-Y jackpot".

The fluctuation patterns for "non-reach miss", "normal reach miss", and "normal reach jackpot" are the same as those explained for the fluctuation patterns in normal mode, so we will not explain them here.

＜Super reach with miss/jackpot＞
In this embodiment, in the variation patterns accompanying the super reach ("SP-X miss", "SP-Y miss", "SP-X jackpot", "SP-Y jackpot"), the final display result is fixed and stopped by executing the super reach presentation that notifies whether or not the "jackpot" has been won. The variation patterns of the "SP-Y miss" and the "SP-Y jackpot" are the same as the variation patterns of the "SP-B miss" and "SP-B1 jackpot" described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

(Special annihilation performance)
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns accompanying the super reach, in the "SP-X miss" and "SP-X jackpot" variation patterns, after the reach state is established, a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the variation display result will be a "miss" is temporarily displayed in a stopped state (temporary miss notification), and then the pattern develops into a super reach, and a super reach performance (hereinafter referred to as "annihilation SP performance" as appropriate) is executed to notify whether or not a "jackpot" has been won by attacking to annihilate a group of enemy characters Y (hereinafter referred to as "enemy character Y group" as appropriate) (see Figure 9-68).

Here, if the change pattern is "SP-X Miss", an effect in which the enemy character Y group remains (remaining effect) is executed (see FIG. 9-68 (3A)), and it is announced that the final display result will be "Miss". On the other hand, if the change pattern is "SP-X Big Hit", an effect in which the enemy character Y is annihilated (annihilation effect) is executed (see FIG. 9-68 (3B)), and it is announced that the final display result will be "Big Hit".

Figure 9-5 is a fluctuation pattern determination table in the Powerful RUSH mode. As shown in Figure 9-5 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [misses] in the Powerful RUSH mode, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 950 are assigned to "non-reach misses", 951 to 980 to "normal reach misses", 981 to 985 to "SP-X misses", and 986 to 997 to "SP-Y misses".

Also, as shown in Figure 9-5 (B), in the Powerful RUSH mode [jackpot] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot", 501 to 600 to the "SP-X jackpot", and 601 to 997 to the "SP-Y jackpot" fluctuation patterns.

[Scratch processing of sound effects]
In this embodiment, it is possible to reproduce and output the effect sounds (music, dialogue, sound effects, error notification sounds, etc.) from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this embodiment, it is possible to perform special processing (referred to as "scratch processing" in this example) on a part of the effect sounds and reproduce and output them. Scratching is a technique in which an analog record is forcibly moved by hand while playing the record on a turntable, thereby drastically changing the playback speed to produce a special sound (hereinafter referred to as "scratch sound" as appropriate). Scratch processing is a process that uses sound data (e.g., waveform data such as a Wave file) in a memory section of an audio control board, rather than an analog record, to generate an effect sound similar to a scratch sound on an analog record in a pseudo manner. Hereinafter, scratch processing will be referred to as "scratch processing" as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the scratch process reproduces a sound effect similar to a scratch sound by repeatedly playing back the same sound data (hereinafter referred to as "scratch sound data") at short intervals.

The scratch sound data is sound data that includes one or more sounds (a line, a sound effect, a musical piece, etc.) and is sound data that is composed of the sound (one or more sounds) of the initial letters of words related to the various effects that appear in this gaming machine. In this embodiment, the scratch sound data is sound data that includes one sound (a line, a sound effect, a musical piece, etc.) and is sound data that is composed of the first sound of the initial letters of words related to the various effects that appear in this gaming machine.

For example, it is possible to execute scratch processing on sound data corresponding to the first letter (first sound) "Bu" of the word "V Stock" related to the V Stock performance described below. Also, it is possible to execute scratch processing on sound data corresponding to the first letter (first sound) "We" of the word "Welcome" which is part of the lyrics related to Song X among the songs played and output during the jackpot game described below.

In this embodiment, scratch processing is not performed on sound data of words in which the same sound (second sound or later) as the sound of the first letter of the word (first sound) is repeated multiple times. For example, scratch processing is not performed on sound data corresponding to the first letter (first sound) "o" of the word "big hit (Oo Atari)." If scratch processing were to be performed on sound data corresponding to the first letter (first sound) "o" of the word "big hit (Oo Atari)," there is a risk that the player would be confused as to whether the first sound "o" has been scratched and played back or the second sound "o" has been played back, and this is to prevent this.

In addition, without being limited to the above embodiment, scratch processing may be performed on a word in which the same sound (second sound or later) as the initial sound (first sound) of the word is repeated multiple times. For example, scratch processing may be performed on sound data corresponding to the initial sound (first sound) "o" of the word "big hit" (Oo Atari), and after "o" is played and output four times in succession, the second sound "o" may be played and output.

In this embodiment, the sound effect (sound data) may be composed of a first sound effect (first sound data) and a second sound effect (second sound data) that is played and output after the first sound effect. In this embodiment, the number of sounds included in the first sound effect is less than the number of sounds included in the second sound effect. For example, sound data corresponding to the word "V (V) Stock" is composed of first sound data corresponding to the first letter "Bu" (1 sound) and second sound data corresponding to the second and subsequent letters "I Stock" (4 sounds). In this case, it is possible to perform scratch processing on the first sound effect "Bu" to play and output it, and then play and output the second sound effect "I Stock" without performing scratch processing.

In this embodiment, the number of consecutive occurrences of the same sound data (scratch sound data) in the scratch process is set to two or more. For example, the number of consecutive occurrences of scratch sound data may be set to two or four depending on which effect is being executed in the scratch process.

In this embodiment, the scratch sound data may be played and output at any interval. For example, when scratch sound data is played and output four times in a row (i.e., when there are three intervals between playback and output), the scratch sound data may be played and output three times at 0 second intervals, or all three times at 1 second intervals, or the first time at 1 second intervals, the second time at 2 second intervals, and the third time at 3 second intervals, or the first time at 3 second intervals, the second time at 2 second intervals, and the third time at 1 second intervals. Hereinafter, the playback and output interval of the scratch sound data is referred to as the "scratch interval".

In this way, by continuously playing back the scratch sound data at short intervals, it is possible to give the player an impression or memory of the sound produced when the scratch process was executed (a refrain effect), improving the effect of the sound produced. Also, the more consecutive scratch sound data is played back, the greater the refrain effect.

In addition, without being limited to the above embodiment, the sound data on which the scratch process is performed may be sound data consisting of two or more sounds. For example, after performing scratch processing on the sound data corresponding to the "V" (first and second sounds) of "V (V) Stock" and playing and outputting it, the "Stock" may be played and output without performing scratch processing.

[Example of playback output of scratch-processed sound effects]
9-6(A) is a specific example of a sound effect type table in this embodiment. The sound effect type table is a storage area for reproducing sound data, and is provided in a storage unit included in the audio control board.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(A), a sound effect type corresponding to the word "powerful" is stored, and this sound effect is composed of a first sound effect corresponding to the first letter "pa" and a second sound effect corresponding to the second and subsequent letters "waful."

Figure 9-6 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the playback output when the performance sound in this embodiment is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Figure 9-6 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the playback output when a performance sound without scratch processing in this embodiment is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (B1), the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs the performance sound "Powerful" from speakers 8L and 8R without executing scratch processing. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs the first performance sound "Pa" from speakers 8L and 8R without executing scratch processing, and plays and outputs the second performance sound "Waffle" from speakers 8L and 8R.

Figure 9-6 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the playback output when the effect sound produced by the scratch process in this embodiment is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (B2), the performance control CPU 120 executes a scratch process to play and output the performance sound "powerful" from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes a scratch process to play and output the first performance sound "Pa" four times in succession from speakers 8L and 8R, and plays and outputs the first and second performance sounds "Powerful" from speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, when the effect sound is scratched and played back, other effect devices may also be linked to perform effects. For example, when the scratch process is executed to play back the first effect sound "pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row, the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light (blink) in accordance with the timing of the playback output of the first effect sound. In addition, when the scratch process is executed to play back the first effect sound "pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row, the light guide plate provided on the image display device 5 may be made to emit light (blink) in accordance with the timing of the playback output of the first effect sound. In addition, when the scratch process is executed to play back the first effect sound "pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R four times in a row, the stick controller 31A may be vibrated in accordance with the timing of the playback output of the first effect sound.

[Sound impact]
In this embodiment, the "impact of sound" refers to the momentum when the playback output of the sound starts (hereinafter referred to as "start" or "rise" as appropriate). Hereinafter, it will be referred to as "impact" as appropriate. Figures 9-7 (1) to (3) show graphs with time on the horizontal axis and output volume (%) on the vertical axis.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the impact is the portion of the audio output volume from the minimum value (0%) to the maximum value (100%). Below, the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the audio output volume is referred to as the "output absolute value" as appropriate. Also, the period from the minimum value (0%) to the maximum value (100%) of the audio output volume is referred to as the "impact time", and in this example, the impact time is the period from t0 to t1.

<Strength and weakness of sound impact>
In this embodiment, the impact is
IM = absolute output value / impact time (Equation 1)
It is possible to determine the strength of the impact based on the IM value (hereinafter referred to as the "impact value" where appropriate) calculated by the above formula. The larger the impact value, the stronger the impact, and the smaller the impact value, the weaker the impact. In other words, the impact value is the same as the slope (gradient) of the graph shown in FIG. 9-7.

As shown in formula (1), the larger the output absolute value, the larger the impact value, and the smaller the output absolute value, the smaller the impact value (not shown). For example, when the impact time value is constant, the impact value is greater when output absolute value: maximum value (100%) - minimum value (0%) = 100 than when output absolute value: maximum value (50%) - minimum value (0%) = 50.

Also, as shown in formula (1), the smaller the impact time value, the larger the impact value (see Figure 9-7 (2A)), and the larger the impact time value, the smaller the impact value (see Figure 9-7 (2B)). For example, when the output absolute value is constant, the impact value is larger when the impact time: tb(1) - t0(0) = 1 than when the impact time: ta(10) - t0(0) = 10.

The stronger the impact (the larger the impact value), the stronger and more powerful the voice will sound, and the weaker the impact (the smaller the impact value), the stronger and more gentle the voice will sound.

[Sound effects type table]
9-8 and 9-9 are explanatory diagrams of a specific example of the effect sound type table in this embodiment. The effect sound type table is a storage area for playing back sound data, and is provided in a storage unit provided in the audio control board. In Fig. 9-8 and Fig. 9-9, "CH", "effect sound type", "effect sound configuration", "playback output content", "impact strength", and "related effects, related status" are provided. Note that various effects and effect modes not described in detail in the explanation of Fig. 9-8 and Fig. 9-9 will be described later.

As shown in Figures 9-8 and 9-9, the sound effect type table consists of 42 channels, "CH01" to "CH42."

The sound data for the sound effects output by speakers 8L and 8R can be "stereo data" with a relatively large amount of data, or "monaural data" with a relatively small amount of data. In this example, the music is "stereo data", and the sound effects other than the music (speech sounds, sound effects, error notification sounds) are "monaural data".

In the audio playback area, two consecutive channels for storing "stereo data" may or may not constitute a "pair CH." In this case, "monaural data" is stored in one of the channels of this "pair CH."

<Sound effects related to the performance>
In this embodiment, sound data for effects (effect sound) is set to be played back on one of "CH01" to "CH40." When it is time to play back the effect sound, the sound data for the effect sound is stored on a specified channel among "CH01" to "CH40," and is erased from that channel when playback ends.

"CH01" stores the sound effect type: "Music A", sound effect composition: "Music data A", playback output content: "Vocal sound A", "Accompaniment sound A", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related status: "BGM for Powerful RUSH", "BGM for Big Hit Round" (songs selectable when not in V stock).

In "CH02", the following sound effect type is stored: "Song B", sound effect composition: "Song data B", playback output content: "Vocal sound B", "Accompaniment sound B", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related status: "BGM for Powerful RUSH", "BGM for Big Hit Round" (songs selectable when not in V stock).

In "CH03", the following sound effect type is stored: "Music C", sound effect composition: "Music data C", playback output content: "Vocal sound C", "Accompaniment sound C", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related status: "BGM for Powerful RUSH", "BGM for Big Hit Round" (selectable songs when not in V stock).

In "CH04", the following sound effect type is stored: "Music X", sound effect composition: "Music data X1", playback output content: "Vocal sound X1", "Accompaniment sound X1", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related status: "BGM for Powerful RUSH", "BGM for Big Hit Round" (songs selectable when V stock is activated).

In "CH05", the following sound effect type is stored: "Music X", sound effect composition: "Music data X2", playback output content: "Vocal sounds X2", "Accompaniment sounds X2", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related status: "BGM for Powerful RUSH", "BGM for Big Hit Round" (songs selectable when V stock is activated).

In "CH06", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect A "V Stock"", sound effect configuration: "First sound effect A" (First sound effect A1: corresponding to a 10R jackpot, First sound effect A2: corresponding to a 3R jackpot), playback output content: "First dialogue sound A "Bu", "First sound effect A" (First sound effect A1, First sound effect A2), impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related state: "First V Stock effect".

In "CH07", the following are stored: sound effect type: "sound effect A "V stock"", sound effect configuration: "second sound effect A" (second sound effect A1: corresponding to a 10R jackpot, second sound effect A2: corresponding to a 3R jackpot), playback output content: "second dialogue sound A "I stock", "second sound effect A" (second sound effect A1, second sound effect A2), impact strength: "weak", related effects, related state: "first V stock effect".

In "CH08", the effect sound type: "effect sound B", playback output content: "sound effect B", impact strength: "strong", related effects, related state: "CU effect (first movable body effect)".

In "CH09", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect C1 "Complete"", sound effect configuration: "First sound effect C1", playback output content: "First dialogue sound C1 "Ko" (character B voice)", "First sound effect C", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related status: "First normal time jackpot announcement effect".

In "CH10", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect C1 "Complete"", sound effect configuration: "Second sound effect C1", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound C1 "Complete" (character B voice)", "Second sound effect C", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related state: "First normal time jackpot announcement effect".

In "CH11", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect C2 "Victory"", sound effect configuration: "First sound effect C2", playback output content: "First dialogue sound C2 "Vi" (character A voice)", "First sound effect C", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related state: "Second normal time jackpot notification effect (second movable body effect)".

In "CH12", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect C2 "Victory"", sound effect configuration: "Second sound effect C2", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound C2 "Victory" (character A voice)", "Second sound effect C", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related state: "Second normal jackpot notification effect (second movable body effect)".

In "CH13", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect C3 "Congratulations"", sound effect configuration: "First sound effect C3", playback output content: "First dialogue sound C3 "Ko" (character A voice)", "First sound effect C", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related state: "Third normal time jackpot notification effect (third movable body effect)".

In "CH14", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect C3 "Congratulations"", sound effect configuration: "Second sound effect C3", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound C3 "Gratulation" (character A voice)", "Second sound effect C", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related state: "Third normal time jackpot notification effect (third movable body effect)".

In "CH15", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect D1 "Victory"", sound effect configuration: "First sound effect D1", playback output content: "First dialogue sound D1 "Vi" (character A voice)", "First sound effect D", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related states: "First right hit jackpot notification effect", "First right hit special jackpot notification effect" (Powerful RUSH: Dream Dream mode).

In "CH16", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect D1 "Victory"", sound effect configuration: "Second sound effect D1", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound D1 "Victory" (Character A voice)", "Second sound effect D", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related status: "First right hit jackpot notification effect", "First right hit special jackpot notification effect" (Powerful RUSH: Dream Dream mode).

In "CH17", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect D2 "Victory"", sound effect configuration: "First sound effect D2", playback output content: "First dialogue sound D2 "Vi" (character B voice)", "First sound effect D", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related states: "Second right hit jackpot notification effect", "Second right hit special jackpot notification effect" (Powerful RUSH: Nana mode).

In "CH18", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect D2 "Victory"", sound effect configuration: "Second sound effect D2", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound D2 "Victory" (Character B voice)", "Second sound effect D", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related states: "Second right hit jackpot notification effect", "Second right hit special jackpot notification effect" (Powerful RUSH: Nana mode).

In "CH19", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect D3 "Victory"", sound effect configuration: "First sound effect D3", playback output content: "First dialogue sound D3 "Vi" (character C voice)", "First sound effect D", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related states: "Jackpot notification effect on third right hit", "Special jackpot notification effect on third right hit" (Powerful RUSH: Jam mode).

In "CH20", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect D3 "Victory"", sound effect configuration: "Second sound effect D3", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound D3 "Victory" (Character C voice)", "Second sound effect D", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related states: "Jackpot notification effect on third right hit", "Special jackpot notification effect on third right hit" (Powerful RUSH: Jam mode).

In "CH21", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect EA "Ready, go"", sound effect configuration: "First sound effect E", playback output content: "First dialogue sound E "Ready", "First sound effect E", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related status: "Change precursor effect: Success pattern".

In "CH22", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect EA "Ready, go"", sound effect configuration: "Second sound effect EA", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound EA "Go", "Second sound effect EA", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related status: "Change precursor effect: Success pattern".

In "CH23", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect EA "Ready, go"", sound effect composition: "Third sound effect EA", playback output content: "Third dialogue sound EA "Go", "Third sound effect EA", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related status: "Change precursor effect: Success pattern".

In "CH24", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect EB "Lady..."", sound effect composition: "First sound effect E", playback output content: "First dialogue sound E "Lady", "First sound effect E", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related status: "Change precursor effect: Failure pattern".

In "CH25", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect EB "Ready..."", sound effect configuration: "Second sound effect EB", playback output content: "Second sound effect EB", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related status: "Change precursor effect: Failure pattern".

In "CH26", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect F "3, 2, 1 Start"", sound effect configuration: "First sound effect F1", playback output content: "First dialogue sound F1 "1 (One)", "First sound effect F1", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related state: "Time-saving entry effect".

In "CH27", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect F "3, 2, 1 Start"", sound effect configuration: "First sound effect F2", playback output content: "First dialogue sound F2 "2 (Two)", "First sound effect F2", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related state: "Time-saving entry effect".

In "CH28", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect F "3, 2, 1 Start"", sound effect configuration: "First sound effect F3", playback output content: "First dialogue sound F3 "3 (three)", "First sound effect F3", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related state: "Time-saving entry effect".

In "CH29", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect F "3, 2, 1 Start"", sound effect configuration: "Second sound effect F", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound F "S", "Second sound effect F", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related state: "Time-saving entry effect".

In "CH30", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect F "3, 2, 1 Start"", sound effect configuration: "Third sound effect F", playback output content: "Third dialogue sound F "Tart", "Third sound effect F", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related state: "Time-saving entry effect".

In "CH31", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect G "Powerful"", sound effect composition: "First sound effect G", playback output content: "First dialogue sound G "Pa", "First sound effect G", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related state: "Story SP development effect".

In "CH32", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect G "Powerful"", sound effect configuration: "Second sound effect G", playback output content: "Second dialogue sound G "Waffle", "Second sound effect G", impact strength: "Weak", related effects, related state: "Story SP development effect".

"CH33" stores the sound effect type: "Sound effect H "Take that!"", playback output content: "Dialogue sound H "Take that!"", "Sound effect H", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related state: "When the control unit is operated during the annihilation SP".

"CH34" stores the sound effect type: "Sound effect I1 "Press"", playback output content: "Dialogue sound I1 "Press" (Character A voice)", "Sound effect I1", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related status: "Operation prompt display".

"CH35" stores the sound effect type: "Sound effect I2 "Press"", playback output content: "Dialogue sound I2 "Press" (Character B voice)", "Sound effect I2", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related status: "Operation prompt display".

"CH36" stores the sound effect type: "Sound effect I3 "Press"", playback output content: "Dialogue sound I3 "Press" (Character C voice)", "Sound effect I3", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related status: "Operation prompt display".

"CH37" stores the sound effect type: "Sound effect I4 "Press"", playback output content: "Dialogue sound I4 "Press" (three character voices: Character A, Character B, and Character C)", "Sound effect I4", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, and related status: "Operation prompt display".

In "CH38", the following sound effect type is stored: "Sound effect J "Fever"", sound effect composition: "First sound effect J", playback output content: "First dialogue sound J "Fi", "First sound effect J", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related status: "Revival effect".

In "CH39", the following sound effect type is stored: "sound effect J "Fever"", sound effect configuration: "second sound effect J", playback output content: "second dialogue sound J "(Fever)", "second sound effect J", impact strength: "weak", related effects, related state: "revival effect".

"CH40" stores the sound effect type: "sound effect K", playback output content: "sound effect K", impact strength: "strong", related effects, and related state: "premium effect". In this embodiment, in the variable display, it is possible to execute a premium effect that notifies the user that the display result is a "jackpot" at a timing that should not be notified (when the variable starts, when a reach is reached, etc.).

<Error notification sound>
The error notification sound in this embodiment includes an abnormal winning error sound and a magnetic detection error sound. The abnormal winning error sound (error notification sound A) is an error sound detected when a game ball wins at a time other than a specified time, such as when the special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is opened. The magnetic detection error sound (error notification sound B) is an error sound detected when a magnetic force equal to or greater than a specified value is detected by a magnetic detection sensor connected to the main board 11.

The error notification sound has a higher priority for notifying the player than other sound effects such as music. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9, "CH41" and "CH42" are reserved as fixed channels for playing each error notification sound.

In "CH41", the sound type: "Error notification sound A", playback output content: "Error sound effect A", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, related status: "Abnormal winning" are stored.

"CH42" stores the sound effect type: "Error notification sound B", playback output content: "Error sound effect B", impact strength: "Strong", related effects, and related status: "Magnetic detection".

When any of these errors is detected, a channel specific to the error notification sound is specified based on a command to play and output the error notification sound for that error, and the monaural data of the error notification sound is played and output on the specified channel.

In addition, for each channel "CH01" to "CH42" in the audio playback area shown in Figures 9-8 and 9-9, a "basic volume," "channel setting ratio," "volume value," and "output volume" are set.

The "basic volume" is a value that indicates the volume of the sound data itself. The basic volume can be set according to the priority with which the player should be notified. In this example, the basic volume can be set between "1" and "5." The higher the basic volume value, the higher the sound pressure level of the output sound (the more emphasized the output sound is).

As shown in Figures 9-8 and 9-9, the basic volume differs depending on the type of effect sound. Specifically, the basic volume of "Error Notification Sound A (Abnormal Winning)" and "Error Notification Sound B (Magnetic Detection)" is the maximum of "5". On the other hand, the basic volume of the sound data for effect sounds is "4" or lower ("3" or "4"). This is because, compared to abnormal winning errors and magnetic detection errors, effect sounds are less likely to be directly related to fraudulent behavior by the player and therefore have a lower priority for notifying the player.

Furthermore, the basic volume of the sound data for the sound effects varies depending on the type of sound effect. In this example, the basic volume of the sound effects related to the songs "CH01" to "CH05" is "3." On the other hand, the basic volume of the sound effects related to the songs other than the songs "CH06" to "CH40" is "4."

However, this is not limited to the above, and multiple base volumes may be set for the sound data of the sound effects.

For example, the basic volume of the "bu" [first performance sound A] of performance sound A is set to "1", "2", "3", and "4". When [first performance sound A] is played back and output four times in a row with scratch processing, the basic volume may be increased and the output volume may also be increased with each output count, such as the first [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 1), the second [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 2), the third [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 3), and the fourth [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 4). Also, the basic volume may be decreased and the output volume may also be decreased with each output count, such as the first [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 4), the second [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 3), the third [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 2), and the fourth [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 1).

It can also be applied to the performance sounds related to music. For example, the basic volume of [music data X1] of music X is set to "1", "2", "3", or "4". When [music data X1] is played back and output four times in a row with scratch processing, the basic volume may be increased and the output volume may also be increased with each increase in the number of outputs, such as the first [music data X1] (basic volume: 1), the second [music data X1] (basic volume: 2), the third [music data X1] (basic volume: 3), and the fourth [music data X1] (basic volume: 4). Also, the basic volume may be decreased and the output volume may also be decreased with each increase in the number of outputs, such as the first [music data X1] (basic volume: 4), the second [music data X1] (basic volume: 3), the third [music data X1] (basic volume: 2), and the fourth [music data X1] (basic volume: 1).

The "channel setting ratio" is the volume value specified for each channel. The channel setting ratio can be set for each channel from maximum volume "1", which is 100% of the reference output volume, to full mute "0", which is 0%.

The "volume value" is the upper limit (volume value) of the volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this example, the master volume can be set between "1" and "5." This volume value can be set to any value by the player performing a specific operation (for example, operating the up and down buttons of the performance keys provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1).

"Output volume" is the volume of the sound played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R. The output volume is determined based on the "basic volume", "channel setting ratio", and "volume value" contained in the sound data. The output volume is a numerical value obtained by multiplying the "basic volume", "channel setting ratio", and "volume value". In this example, the output volume can be set between "0" and "25".

As shown in FIG. 9-9, error notification sounds that have a high priority and should be notified to the player are played back and output by the fixed channels "CH41" and "CH42." Unlike the other channels ("CH01" to "CH40"), these fixed channels "CH41" and "CH42" play back and output sounds with a fixed maximum output volume of "5." Specifically, in "CH41" and "CH42," the volume value is always fixed at the maximum value of "5" without accepting a specific operation by the player (for example, operating the up and down buttons of the performance keys provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1).

<Fade, Mute>
Next, fade (fade out, fade in) and mute, which are processes for changing the "output volume", will be explained. These fade out, fade in and mute are executed by changing the "output volume" in conjunction with changing the "channel setting ratio" shown in Figures 9-8 and 9-9.

Here, in fade-out, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound being played back is gradually decreased from "1 (100%)" to "0 (0%)", thereby gradually decreasing the output volume to "0". In fade-in, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound being played back is gradually increased from "0 (0%)" to "1 (100%)", thereby gradually increasing the output volume to its maximum value.

For example, it is possible to gradually decrease the channel setting ratio of the effect sound (second effect sound) that is played back after the scratched effect sound (first effect sound A) from "1 (100%)" to "0 (0%)" to fade it out.

In addition, when muting, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound being played back is set to "0 (0%)", and the output volume of the effect sound being played back is set to "0". Note that while the output volume is "0" when muting is being executed, the effect sound itself is being played back. Note that when an error notification sound that has a high priority and should be notified to the player is being output, the other channels "CH01" to "CH40" may all be muted.

Thus, with fade-out, the output volume of the performance sound being played back is gradually reduced and eventually becomes "0" (for example, from 1 (100%) to 0.5 (50%) to 0 (0%)), whereas with mute, the output volume of the performance sound being played back is immediately reduced to "0" (for example, from 1 (100%) to 0 (0%)). In other words, mute is a control that reduces the output volume of the performance sound (to 0) in a shorter time than fade-out, and is a control that reduces the output volume to a greater extent per unit time.

[Complementary Color Contrast]
In this embodiment, when the display colors of an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are complementary to each other, the saturation of each display color is intensified, making the color appear even more vivid. This phenomenon is called "complementary color contrast" (hereinafter, referred to as "complementary color inversion" as appropriate). Complementary colors are colors that are opposite each other when expressed on a color wheel, which will be described later, and in addition to the colors on the color wheel, they are also black against white (white against black).

<Color wheel>
A color wheel is a circular arrangement of hues, and is one of the methods used to organize colors. Colors are perceived as continuously changing, such as red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and purple, depending on the wavelength of light. A continuous arrangement of these hues in a circular ring is called a color wheel.

In order to convey colors accurately, a regular method of expressing colors is necessary. In this embodiment, this color display system is called the Color Order System, and can be represented by a hue wheel. As shown in Figure 9-10 (1), the color system in this embodiment is composed of 12 hues: the six basic hues (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, purple) plus intermediate hues between these six basic hues (red-orange, yellow-orange, yellow-green, blue-green, blue-purple, red-purple).

In this embodiment, the colors that are complementary to a specific color on the color wheel are the color opposite the specific color on the color wheel and its approximate colors (one color on each side). For example, the colors that are complementary to yellow are the purple color opposite yellow on the color wheel and its approximate colors (the reddish purple and blue-purple colors on both sides).

＜Black and White＞
In this embodiment, white and black, which are not included in the color wheel, are also considered to be complementary colors. As shown in FIG. 9-10(2), in this embodiment, the color complementary to white is black, and the color complementary to black is white.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which complementary color contrast was used as a method for increasing the saturation of the display color of an image displayed on the image display device 5 to make it look even more vivid, but the present invention is not limited to this form. The following method may also be used to increase the saturation of the display color of an image displayed on the image display device 5 to make it look even more vivid.

Brightness inversion Brightness inversion is a method of inverting the brightness of the displayed colors of an image. For example, bright parts of the displayed colors become darker, and dark parts of the displayed colors become lighter.

Tone inversion Tone inversion is a method of inverting the brightness and color of an image. For example, it inverts the brightness and complementary colors.

[Movable body]
In this embodiment, a movable body YM, which is a role piece, is provided near (at the upper center) the image display device 5. The movable body YM operates between an initial position, a first operating position (where a part of the movable body overlaps with the area of the image display device 5), and a second operating position (where the entire movable body overlaps with the area of the image display device 5) according to the control of the performance control board 12. Hereinafter, the first operating position and the second operating position will be referred to as "performance positions" as appropriate.

For example, the movable body YM may move from the initial position to the first operating position to the initial position, from the initial position to the second operating position to the initial position, from the initial position to the first operating position to the second operating position to the initial position, or from the second operating position to the first operating position to the initial position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), when the movable body YM is in the initial position, the movable body YM is not positioned in front of the image display device 5. In other words, in this embodiment, when the movable body YM is in the initial position, it does not overlap the area of the image display device 5 and is configured not to affect the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when the movable body YM is moving from the initial position to the performance position (first operating position, second operating position) or when the movable body YM is in the performance position, the movable body YM is positioned in front of the image display device 5. That is, in this embodiment, when the movable body YM is moving from the initial position to the performance position or when the movable body YM is in the performance position, it overlaps with the area of the image display device 5, affecting the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (2), when the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the first operating position or when the movable body YM is in the first operating position, the movable body YM overlaps with the upper central area of the screen of the image display device 5, affecting the visibility of part of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3), when the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position or when the movable body YM is in the second operating position, the movable body YM overlaps with the center of the screen of the image display device 5, affecting the visibility of part of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, when a CU effect that indicates a high probability of a jackpot or a jackpot notification effect that notifies a jackpot is executed during the battle SP, the movable body YM moves to the performance position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body YM has a regular hexagonal shape that includes a design that resembles ally character A. Ally character A of this movable body YM is a common character with ally character A that appears in the super reach performance (in this example, battle SP performance and story SP performance).

[Game Flow]
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described. In this example, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the first flag and the second flag described later are not set is set to [normal mode], the game state is controlled to either the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the first flag described later is set is set to [challenge mode], and the game state is controlled to either the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the second flag described later is set is set to [rush mode].

In the example game flow shown in Figure 9-12, when a jackpot occurs when the presentation mode is [normal mode], after the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and transitions to [challenge mode] (time-saving 1 spin + reserved 4 spins) or [rush mode] (time-saving 99 spins + reserved 4 spins), and if a jackpot occurs, transitions to [rush mode] (time-saving 7 spins + reserved 4 spins, or time-saving 99 spins + reserved 4 spins), and transitions to [normal mode] if a jackpot does not occur.

(1) When the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) and the first flag and the second flag described below are not set, the presentation mode is set to [normal mode].

(2) In the state of (1) described above, when a variable display is executed that results in a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot types for the first special symbol are a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" and a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot", and (2A) as an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot", the word "BONUS" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is a 3R jackpot, and (2B) as an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot", the word "MAX BONUS" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is a 10R jackpot.

(3) When the jackpot ends in the case where the jackpot type in (2A) above is a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot", the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation sets the presentation mode to [challenge mode] when (3A-I) the first flag is set, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and one variable display is executed, and when (3A-II) the first flag is set, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and a reserved memory (a variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum of four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred in (3A-I) is executed. As an example of a presentation when the presentation mode is [challenge mode], the words "RUSH Challenge" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the presentation mode will be switched to [challenge mode].

In state (3), when one variable display in the time-saving state in which all display results are "misses" and the pending memory (variable displays whose execution is pending (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time is executed, control is made to state (1). In this example, when controlled from state (3) to state (1), control is made to state (1A) (presentation mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

(4) When the jackpot type (6A) is "3R jackpot B" or (6B) is "10R jackpot B" as described below, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation sets the presentation mode to [rush mode] when (4A-I) the second flag is set, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and seven variable displays are executed, and when (4A-II) the second flag is set, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the reserved memory (the variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum of four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred in (4A-I) is executed. As an example of a presentation when the presentation mode is [rush mode], the characters "POWERFUL RUSH" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the presentation mode will be changed to [rush mode].

In state (4), when seven variable displays in the time-saving state in which all display results are "misses" and the pending memory (variable displays whose execution is pending (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time are executed, control is performed to state (1).

(5) When the jackpot in the case of the (2B) jackpot type "10R time-saving jackpot" described above ends, or when the jackpot in the case of the (6C) "10R jackpot A" described below ends, the presentation control CPU 120 sets the presentation mode to [rush mode] (with V stock) when (5B-I) the second flag is set, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and 99 variable displays (1st to 99th spins) are executed, and (5B-II) the second flag is set, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the reserved memory (the variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at (5B-I) is executed.

In addition, when the V-Stock Flag (see FIG. 9-47) described later is set and the jackpot type is (6A) "3R jackpot B" or (6B) "10R jackpot B" as described above, the machine is controlled to (5B-I) and (5B-II) as described above.

As an example of a presentation when the presentation mode is [Rush Mode] (with V stocks), a rainbow-colored caption announcing that the presentation mode will shift to [Rush Mode] (with V stocks) and the words "Powerful RUSH" are displayed on the image display device 5.

In state (5), when 99 variable displays in the time-saving state in which all display results are "misses" and the reserved memory (variable displays whose execution is reserved (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred at this time are executed, control is performed to state (1). However, in this embodiment in which a small win occurs with a probability of about 1/7 in the variable display of the second special pattern, state (5) in which the number of time-saving controls is 99 is essentially a state in which a big win via the next small win is confirmed when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, so an example of control from state (5) to state (1) is not shown.

(6) When the presentation mode is [Challenge Mode] (see (3)), or when the presentation mode is [Rush Mode] (see (4) and (5)), if the display result in any of the variable displays becomes "Big Win" or "Small Win", the game is controlled to a big win game state (including a big win game state via a small win). In this embodiment, the big win types of the second special pattern when the display result becomes "Big Win" include "3R pattern time-saving big win" and "10R pattern time-saving big win", and the big win types of the second special pattern via a small win when the display result becomes "Small Win" include "3(2)R time-saving big win via small win" and "10(9)R time-saving big win via small win".

(6A) As an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is a "3R jackpot", the word "BONUS" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is essentially a 3R jackpot, (6B) as an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot A" or "10R jackpot B" of the "10R jackpot", the word "MAX FEVER" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is essentially a 10R jackpot, and (6C) as an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot A" of the "10R jackpot", the word "VSTOCK BONUS" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is essentially a 10R jackpot. At this time, of the jackpot types of the "10R time-saving jackpot", "10R jackpot A" with time-saving control count of 99 times and "10R jackpot B" with time-saving control count of 7 times are set.

[Start-up winning performance determination process]
When a start winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits to the performance control CPU 120 the result of the judgment at the time of winning, which is a judgment result of whether or not a jackpot will be obtained, a pattern designation command indicating the judgment result of the type of jackpot, a variable category command indicating the judgment result of the variable pattern among the judgment results at the time of winning, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command, second reserved memory number addition designation command) which specifies that the reserved memory number has increased by 1.

Figure 9-13 is a flowchart showing the start-up winning presentation determination process. The presentation control CPU 120 executes the start-up winning presentation determination process in the advance notice setting process (step S161) of the presentation control process shown in Figure 7.

In the start winning presentation decision process, the presentation control CPU 120 first checks whether a set of start winning commands (e.g., a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a first or second reserved memory count increment designation command) based on the occurrence of a start winning at the start winning port has been newly received (step S05TM1010).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a set of symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, and first or second reserved memory number addition designation commands have been newly stored in the start winning command storage area. If a set of start winning commands has not been newly received (step S05TM1010: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If a new command for the start of a set of winnings has been received (step S05TM1010: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the change pre-reading prohibition flag described below is set (step S05TM1020). If the change pre-reading prohibition flag is set (step S05TM1020: YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

In this embodiment, the change read-ahead prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set based on the decision that at least one of the change effects (pending change effect, active change effect) described below or the R pending effect described below will be executed. When the change read-ahead prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S05TM1030 to S05TM1070 is skipped, so that in a state where it has been decided to execute a change effect or an R pending effect on a pending memory whose execution is pending or an active display that is currently being executed, it is possible to restrict the execution of a change effect or an R pending effect that changes the pending display or active display on a variable display corresponding to a new start winning. This change read-ahead prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the start winning effect determination processing when the change read-ahead prohibition flag was set ends.

If the change pre-read prohibition flag is not set (step S05TM1020: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display based on a table for determining the final display mode of the active display (see Figure 9-14 (A)) (step S05TM1030).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the pending display and the active display based on the change pattern determination table (see Figures 9-14 (B1) to 9-15 (B4)) (step S05TM1040).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the type of change performance, which will be described later, based on a table for determining the type of change performance (see FIG. 9-16 (A)) (step S05TM1050).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the change precursor performance described below (step S05TM1060). If it has been decided not to execute the change precursor performance (step S05TM1060: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM1080.

If it has been decided to execute a change precursor effect (step S05TM1060: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an R hold effect based on a table for determining whether or not to execute an R hold effect (see FIG. 9-16 (B)) (step S05TM1070).

After step S05TM1070, or after step S05TM1060: NO, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it has been decided to execute either a change performance or an R hold performance (step S05TM1080).

If it has been decided not to execute either the change effect or the R hold effect (step S05TM1080: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If it has been decided to execute either a change effect or an R hold effect (step S05TM1080: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a change look-ahead counter (described below) (step S05TM1090), sets a change look-ahead prohibition flag (step S05TM1100), and ends the process.

In this embodiment, a look-ahead counter is set that indicates the number of change displays until the change display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance is executed. In this example, the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of change displays until the change display that is the target of the change performance or R hold performance among the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "change look-ahead counter."

[Tables referenced in the start winning performance determination process]
9-14 to 9-16 are specific examples of tables referenced in any of the processes of the start winning performance determination process. FIG. 9-14(A) is an example of a final display mode determination table of the active display referenced when determining the final display mode of the active display in step S05TM1030. FIG. 9-14(B1) to FIG. 9-15(B4) are examples of change pattern determination tables referenced when determining the change pattern of the reserved display and the active display in step S05TM1040. FIG. 9-16(A) is an example of a performance type determination table of the change performance referenced when determining the performance type of the change performance in step S05TM1050. FIG. 9-16(B) is an example of an execution/non-execution determination table of the R reserved performance referenced when determining the execution/non-execution of the R reserved performance in step S05TM1070.

<Active display final display mode determination table>
Fig. 9-14(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in Fig. 9-14(A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of active display can be determined to be one of "normal mode", "blue mode", "red mode", and "gold mode", and a judgment value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in Figure 9-14 (A), when the judgment result at the time of the initial winning is "miss" (i.e. when the judgment result specified by the pattern specification command is "miss"), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the initial winning (new reserved memory) will be the normal mode (white circle display) 90% of the time, the blue mode (blue circle display) 5% of the time, the red mode (red circle display) 3% of the time, and the gold mode (gold circle display) 2% of the time.

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of the initial winning is "jackpot" (i.e. the judgment result specified by the pattern specification command is "jackpot"), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on that initial winning (new reserved memory) will be the normal mode 75% of the time, the blue mode 6% of the time, the red mode 9% of the time, and the gold mode 10% of the time.

In this way, the expected probability of a jackpot is set for the final display mode of the active display in the following relationship: normal mode < blue mode < red mode < gold mode.

<Change Pattern Determination Table>
9-14 (B1) and (B2), and 9-15 (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table of the reserved display and the active display. When the reserved memory number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the timing when the nth reserved display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the reserved display area (the timing of the start winning), (ii) the timing when the reserved display corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position (the active display area side) in the variable ranking in the reserved display area (in the case of n ≧ 2), and (iii) the timing when the reserved display corresponding to the start winning shifts to the active display area (the timing when the active display corresponding to the start winning is displayed), the display information (reserved display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a manner different from the normal manner.

In the explanation of Figures 9-14 (B1) and (B2) and Figures 9-15 (B3) and (B4), active shift refers to the pending display shifting from the pending display area to the active display area (as a result, the active display corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of judgment at the time of the initial winning is displayed).

Figures 9-14 (B1) and (B2), as well as Figures 9-15 (B3) and (B4) show the display form of the display information (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display at each of the timings (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. In the change patterns shown in the figures, "normal" indicates the normal form in which a white circle is displayed, "blue" indicates the blue form in which a blue circle is displayed, "red" indicates the red form in which a red circle is displayed, and "gold" indicates the gold form in which a gold circle is displayed.

([For 1 reserved item] Change pattern determination table)
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "1", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for one reserved item shown in Fig. 9-14 (B1). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 101 to 108 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal manner at the time of the start winning, and then the pending display of the predicted target remains in the normal manner at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a normal → normal change pattern.

Similarly, change pattern 102 is normal → blue, change pattern 103 is blue → blue, change pattern 104 is blue → red, change pattern 105 is red → red, change pattern 106 is blue → gold, change pattern 107 is red → gold, and change pattern 108 is gold → gold.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the pattern specification command, i.e., "miss," "big win," or "small win"), in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the normal mode, the judgment value is assigned so that the change pattern 101 is determined 100% of the time.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 40%, the change pattern 102 at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 103 at a rate of 30%.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 102 at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 103 at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 104 at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 105 at a rate of 20%.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the gold mode, the judgment values are allocated so that change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 65%, and change patterns 102 to 108 are each determined at a rate of 5%.

(Change pattern determination table for [2 reserved items])
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "2", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for two reserved items shown in Fig. 9-14 (B2). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 201 to 211 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 201 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal state at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal state at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 202 is normal → normal → blue, change pattern 203 is normal → blue → blue, change pattern 204 is blue → blue → blue, change pattern 205 is normal → blue-red, change pattern 206 is blue → blue → red, change pattern 207 is blue → red → red, change pattern 208 is a red → red → red change pattern, change pattern 209 is a blue → red → gold change pattern, change pattern 210 is a red → gold → gold change pattern, and change pattern 211 is a gold → gold → gold change pattern.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the pattern specification command, i.e., "miss", "big win", or "small win"), in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the normal mode, the judgment value is assigned so that the change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that each of change patterns 201 to 204 is determined with a ratio of 25%.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 30%, and change patterns 202 to 208 are each determined at a rate of 10%.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the gold mode, the judgment values are allocated so that change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 50%, and change patterns 202 to 211 are each determined at a rate of 5%.

([3 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "3", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for three reserved items shown in Fig. 9-15 (B3). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 301 to 309 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 301 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal state at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal state at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal state at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal state at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 302 is normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 303 is normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 304 is blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 305 is normal → blue → red → red, change pattern 306 is blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 307 is blue → red → red → red, change pattern 308 is a red → red → red → red change pattern, and change pattern 309 is gold → gold → gold → gold.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the pattern specification command, i.e., "miss," "big win," or "small win"), in cases where the final display mode of the determined active display is the normal mode, the judgment value is assigned so that the change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 100%.

When the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that each of change patterns 301 to 304 is determined at a rate of 25%.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 30%, and change patterns 302 to 308 are each determined at a rate of 10%.

When the final display mode of the determined active display is the gold mode, the judgment values are allocated so that change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 60%, and change patterns 302 to 309 are each determined at a rate of 5%.

([4 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "4", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for four reserved items shown in Fig. 9-15 (B4). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 401 to 413 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 401 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, that is, a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 402 is normal → normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 403 is normal → normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 404 is normal → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 405 is blue → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 406 is normal → normal → blue → red → red, change pattern 407 is normal → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 408 is normal → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 409 is blue → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 410 is blue → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 411 is blue → red → red → red → red, change pattern 412 is a red → red → red → red → red change pattern, and change pattern 413 is a gold → gold → gold → gold → gold change pattern.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the pattern specification command, i.e., "miss," "big win," or "small win"), in cases where the final display mode of the determined active display is the normal mode, the judgment value is assigned so that the change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 100%.

When the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that each of change patterns 401 to 405 is determined with a ratio of 20%.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 12%, and change patterns 402 to 412 are each determined at a rate of 8%.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the gold mode, the judgment values are allocated so that change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 40%, and change patterns 402 to 413 are each determined at a rate of 5%.

[Transformation effect type determination table]
Fig. 9-16(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation type determination table for change presentation. As shown in Fig. 9-16(A), in this embodiment, the presentation type of change presentation can be determined as one of "normal change presentation (change premonition presentation: none)", "special change presentation (change premonition presentation: success pattern)", "no change presentation (change premonition presentation: failure pattern)", and "no change presentation (change premonition presentation: none)", and a judgment value is assigned to each of these. The normal change presentation, special change presentation, and change premonition presentation (success pattern, failure pattern) will be described later.

As shown in Figure 9-16 (A), when the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new pending memory) is the normal mode and the change pattern is any of change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, the judgment value is assigned so that the type of change effect is determined to be no change effect (change precursor effect: failure pattern) at a rate of 2% and no change effect (change precursor effect: none) at a rate of 98%.

In addition, if the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new pending memory) is the normal mode, and the change pattern is not any of change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, a judgment value is assigned so that the type of change effect is determined to be no change effect (change precursor effect: none) 100% of the time.

In addition, if the final display state of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new pending memory) is a blue state, the judgment value is assigned so that the type of change effect is determined to be normal change effect (no change precursor effect) at a rate of 100% regardless of the change pattern.

In addition, if the final display state of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new pending memory) is a red state, and the change pattern is any of change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, the judgment value is allocated so that the type of change effect is determined to be normal change effect (change precursor effect: none) at 30% and special change effect (change precursor effect: successful pattern) at 70%.

In addition, if the final display state of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new pending memory) is a red state, and the change pattern is not any of change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, a judgment value is assigned so that the type of change effect is determined to be a normal change effect (no change precursor effect) at a rate of 100%.

Furthermore, when the final display state of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new pending memory) is a gold state, and the change pattern is any of change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, the judgment value is allocated so that the type of change effect is determined to be normal change effect (change precursor effect: none) at 10% and special change effect (change precursor effect: successful pattern) at 90%.

In addition, if the final display state of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new reserved memory) is a gold state, and the change pattern is not any of change patterns 101, 201, 301, or 401, a judgment value is assigned so that the type of change effect is determined to be a normal change effect (no change precursor effect) at a rate of 100%.

[Table for deciding whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect (R hold effect) of the change premonition effect]
Fig. 9-16(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the R-reserved effect. As shown in Fig. 9-16(B), in this embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the R-reserved effect ("no execution" or "execution"), and a judgment value is assigned to each of these.

As shown in FIG. 9-16(B), the judgment values are allocated so that there is a 50% chance that it will be decided not to execute the R reserved effect, and a 50% chance that it will be decided to execute the R reserved effect.

[Change Production]
In this embodiment, a change effect can be executed based on the result of the determination at the time of the start winning. The change effect is an example of a notice effect in which the corresponding display (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of the determination at the time of the start winning is displayed in a blue, red, or gold state different from the normal state.

Specifically, among the change effects, the pending change effect in which the display mode of the pending display is displayed in a different display mode (either a blue mode, a red mode, or a gold mode) from the normal mode is a look-ahead preview effect that suggests the display result of the pending memory whose execution is pending. Also, among the change effects, the active change effect in which the display mode of the active display is displayed in a different display mode (either a blue mode or a red mode) is a changing preview effect that suggests the display result of the changing display that is being executed. Also, in this embodiment, as change effects, normal change effects with different presentation modes and special change effects can be executed.

[Normal transformation effect]
In this embodiment, a normal change performance can be executed as a change performance that changes the display mode of the reserved display or active display. The normal change performance is a performance that changes the corresponding display (reserved display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning to a mode different from the normal mode at (i) the timing when the n-th reserved display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the reserved display area (the timing of the start winning), (ii) the timing when the reserved display corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position (active display area side) in the variable ranking in the reserved display area (when n ≧ 2), (iii) the timing when the reserved display corresponding to the start winning shifts to the active display area (the timing when the active display corresponding to the start winning is displayed), or (iv) a predetermined timing during the variable display of the special pattern (the decorative pattern corresponding to it).

<Example of normal transformation effects>
9-17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the image and sound of each effect related to the normal change effect. In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the normal state, the active display is changed to a blue color.

In the diagrams of this embodiment, for the sake of convenience in explaining the presentation example, the presentation sounds that are played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R are shown below the image display device 5. The actual positional relationship of each device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R) in this embodiment is as shown in Figure 8-1.

In addition, these figures may show examples in which a specific sound effect is being played back from speakers 8L, 8R, but this is merely a characteristic example in this embodiment, and even when an example is shown in which a specific sound effect is being played back from speakers 8L, 8R, another sound effect different from the specific sound effect may be played back, and even when an example is shown in which no sound effect is being played back from speakers 8L, 8R, any sound effect may be played back. These are similarly applicable to the following figures.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not play or output any of the performance sounds related to the normal change performance from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), the performance control CPU 120 executes a normal change performance, changing the active display in the normal mode of the active display area ACE to the active display AC1 in the blue mode.

[Change Premonitions]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a change premonition effect that suggests that a special change premonition effect may be executed. There are success patterns and failure patterns for the change premonition effect. When a change premonition effect of a success pattern is executed, a special change premonition effect is executed, and when a change premonition effect of a failure pattern is executed, neither change premonition effect is executed. Hereinafter, a change premonition effect of a success pattern will be appropriately referred to as a "change premonition effect (success pattern)" or "change premonition effect: success pattern", and a change premonition effect of a failure pattern will be appropriately referred to as a "change premonition effect (failure pattern)" or "change premonition effect: failure pattern". The change premonition effect is a series of effects consisting of (1) to (3) shown below.

(1) Premonition of change (first stage)
As shown in FIG. 9-18(1), the change premonition effect (first stage) is an effect in which the active display moves from the active display area to the center of the screen and is enlarged. The enlarged active enlarged display EAC at this time is appropriately referred to as the "enlarged active display." At this time, sound effects EA (success pattern) or sound effects EB (failure pattern) are played and output from speakers 8L, 8R. In this example, sound effects are played and output. Whether the change premonition effect is a success pattern or a failure pattern, the change premonition effect (first stage) has a common performance style.

(2) Premonition of change (second stage)
As shown in FIG. 9-18(2), the change premonition effect (second stage) is an effect in which the word "READY" is displayed in the center of the screen superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC. At this time, the first sound effect E "READY" is played and output from the speakers 8L, 8R in either the case of the sound effect EA (success pattern) or the sound effect EB (failure pattern). Whether the change premonition effect is the success pattern or the failure pattern, the change premonition effect (second stage) has a common presentation style. The word "READY" and the first sound effect E "READY" are information suggesting that a notification will be made as to whether or not a special change premonition will be executed, and can give the player a sense of expectation.

(3) Premonition of change (third stage)
As shown in Fig. 9-18 (3A), the success pattern change precursor effect (third stage) is an effect in which the word "GO" is superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC in the center of the screen. At this time, the second sound effect EA (scratch processing) and the third sound effect EA "GOGOGOGO, GO" are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see Fig. 9-20 (4)). The word "GO", the second sound effect EA (scratch processing), and the third sound effect EA "GOGOGOGO, GO" are information that notify the player that the special change effect is about to begin, and can further increase the interest of the special change effect.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the word "GO" to be superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the playback output of the second performance sound EA and the third performance sound EA. In this example, the second performance sound EA is played back four times and the third performance sound EA is played back once, so the word "GO" is superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC a total of five times in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Specifically, the first character "GO" is displayed at the start of the playback output of the second sound effect EA (first time), and the display of the character "GO" ends at the end of the playback output of the second sound effect EA (first time). The second character "GO" is displayed at the start of the playback output of the second sound effect EA (second time), and the display of the character "GO" ends at the end of the playback output of the second sound effect EA (second time). The third character "GO" is displayed at the start of the playback output of the second sound effect EA (third time), and the display of the character "GO" ends at the end of the playback output of the second sound effect EA (third time). The fourth character "GO" is displayed at the start of the playback output of the second sound effect EA (fourth time), and the display of the character "GO" ends at the end of the playback output of the second sound effect EA (fourth time). Then, when the playback output of the third sound effect EA starts, the word "GO" is displayed for the fifth time, and when the playback output of the third sound effect EA ends, the display of the word "GO" ends.

As shown in FIG. 9-18 (3B), the failure pattern change precursor effect (third stage) is an effect in which a cracked image CI is displayed over the entire screen, superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC. At this time, the second effect sound EB is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

[Special transformation effects]
In this embodiment, a special change effect can be executed as a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display or active display. The special change effect is executed after the change precursor effect (success pattern). The special change effect is a series of effects consisting of the first stage, second stage, and final stage shown below.

(1) Special transformation effect (first stage)
A course display, which is an object resembling an arrow extending from the active display area to the upper left, center, and upper right parts of the screen, is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. Of the course displays, the course display extending from the active display area to the upper left of the screen is called the left course portion, the course display extending from the active display area to the center of the screen is called the center course portion, and the course display extending from the active display area to the upper right part of the screen is called the right course portion.

In addition, an active candidate display (e.g., a blue aspect) that is a candidate for changing the active display is displayed ahead of the left path section, and an active candidate display (e.g., a red aspect) is displayed ahead of the right path section. In addition, a "NEXT" icon is displayed ahead of the center path section, notifying the player that the display aspect of the active display is not indicated at this stage, but that the player will proceed to the next stage (a stage where an active candidate display with a higher probability of winning becomes a candidate for change). One of the path sections lights up to notify the player which path they have progressed to. The aspect of the path section at this time is referred to as the "progression aspect" as appropriate.

(First stage → Final stage)
When the player advances to a path section ahead of which there is an active candidate display, the player is notified that the active display will change to the display mode of the active candidate display. Specifically, the player is notified by emphasizing which display mode the active display will change to by changing the active enlarged display to the display mode of the active candidate display, and then the active enlarged display is reduced to a normal size active display and displayed in the active display area, thereby completing the special change performance.

(First stage → Second stage)
In addition, when the player advances to a path section ahead of which there is a "NEXT" icon, the player is notified that the player will advance to the second stage of the special change performance. Specifically, the "NEXT" icon is displayed surrounded by square objects (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "surrounding aspect") that notify the player that the player has advanced to the "NEXT" icon.

(2) Special transformation performance (second stage)
The route display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In this case, the route display is composed of only the left route section and the right route section, and does not include the center route section. An active candidate display (e.g., in a red color) is displayed ahead of the left route section, and an active candidate display (e.g., in a gold color) is displayed ahead of the right route section.

At this time, the change candidates with a higher probability of winning are displayed in the second stage than in the first stage. Specifically, in the first stage, the change candidates were red modes and below (blue mode, red mode), but in the second stage, the change candidates are red modes and above (red mode, gold mode). Also, since the "NEXT" icon is not displayed, it does not proceed to the next stage, and a notification is displayed that the active display will change to one of the active candidate display modes at this stage.

(Second stage → Final stage)
When the player advances to a course section where any of the active candidate displays is present, the player is notified that the active display will change to the display mode of the active candidate display. Specifically, the player is notified by emphasizing which display mode the active display will change to by changing the active enlarged display to the display mode of the active candidate display, and then the active enlarged display is reduced to a normal size active display and displayed in the active display area, thereby completing the special change performance.

<Examples of a series of effects from premonition effects to special change effects>
9-19 to 9-22 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the effect images and sound effects of each effect related to the special change effect. In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the normal state, the active display is changed to a gold color.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not play or output any of the performance sounds related to the normal change performance from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-19 (2) to Figure 9-20 (4), the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes a change precursor presentation (success pattern). The presentation images and presentation sounds in Figure 9-19 (2) to Figure 9-20 (4) are the same as those in Figure 9-18 (1) to (3A) described above, so explanations are omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a special change presentation (first stage), displays the route display RI on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the active candidate display CAC1 in blue at the end of the left route section, the "NEXT" icon at the end of the central route section, and the active candidate display CAC2 in red at the end of the right route section.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the special change presentation (first stage), changes the central course section of the course display RI on the image display device 5 to a progress state, and changes the "NEXT" icon to a surrounding state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the special change presentation (first stage) and executes the special change presentation (second stage), causing the course display RI to continue to be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and causing the active candidate display CAC2 in red color ahead of the left course section and the active candidate display CAC3 in gold color ahead of the right course section. At this time, the course display RI does not include the central course section.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (8), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the special change presentation (second stage) and changes the right course section of the course display RI on the image display device 5 to a progress state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (9), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the special change presentation (second stage) and executes the special change presentation (final stage), changing the active enlarged display EAC3 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to a gold display mode, which is the display mode of the active candidate display notified in the final course display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (10), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the special change presentation and displays an active display AC3 in a gold color corresponding to the display mode of the active enlarged display in the active display area ACE.

[R Hold Performance]
In this embodiment, the R-hold effect can be executed based on the judgment result at the time of the start winning. The R-hold effect is a type of pre-reading notice effect that notifies the user that a change premonition effect will be executed in the variable display that was the judgment target at the time of the start winning by displaying the display mode of the hold display in the R mode. In this embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the hold memory that is the notice target (target) of the R-hold effect is executed, the change premonition effect (success pattern or failure pattern) is executed. The hold display in the R mode is a mode in which the letter "R" is displayed in the hold display in the normal mode. When the R-hold effect is executed, when the variable display corresponding to the hold memory that is the notice target (target) of the R-hold effect is executed, the active display is displayed in the R mode until the change premonition effect is executed.

In this embodiment, if it is decided to execute the R hold effect based on the judgment result at the time of the start winning, the hold display is displayed in the normal mode from the start winning until the next hold shift, and the hold display is changed to the R mode at the timing of the next hold shift. This is not limited to this form, and the hold display may be changed to the R mode at a timing different from the above timing.

<Example of R hold effect>
9-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the R hold performance. In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed in the normal state, an example is shown in which the R hold performance in which the hold display changes to the R mode is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-23(1), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the decorative symbol combination (in this example, "246") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "246") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the active display AC in the active display area ACE, corresponding to the fact that no variable display is currently being executed, and displays three first pending displays PD1 in the normal state in the first pending display area PD1E. The pending memory in which the third variable display is executed among these first pending displays PD1 is the preview target for the R pending performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In addition, based on the fact that the first hold memory count has reached 2, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to newly display an active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and shifts the first hold displays PD1 in the normal mode that were displayed in the first hold display area PD1E one by one toward the active display area ACE. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 changes the first hold display PD1R, which is the subject of a preview of the R hold performance, to the R mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23(3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the decorative symbol combination (in this example, "132") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "132") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 erases the active display AC in the active display area ACE, in response to the fact that no variable display is currently being performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (4), when the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the varying display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the varying pattern specified by the varying pattern specification command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the varying display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In addition, based on the fact that the first pending memory count has reached 1, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to newly display an active display AC of the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and shifts the first pending display PD1R of the R mode that was displayed in the first pending display area PD1E by one position toward the active display area ACE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (5), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the decorative symbol combination (in this example, "462") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "462") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 erases the active display AC in the active display area ACE, in response to the fact that no variable display is currently being performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the varying display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the varying pattern specified by the varying pattern specification command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the varying display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In addition, based on the first pending memory count becoming 0, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to newly display an active display ACR of the R mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and erases the first pending display PD1R of the R mode that was displayed in the first pending display area PD1E.

[Processing for determining effects at the start of fluctuation]
When the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the special pattern, it transmits a display result designation command that specifies the display result, a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) to the performance control CPU 120.

When the display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) begins, the presentation control CPU 120 is able to determine that the display of the special pattern will be performed and to specify the time to change the special pattern and the content of the presentation (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.) based on receiving from the game control microcomputer 100 a set of commands: a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the reserved memory number has been subtracted; a display result designation command that specifies the display result (jackpot, or miss, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, etc.); and a change pattern designation command that specifies the time to change the special pattern and the content of the presentation (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern has ended and the display result has been determined, the performance control CPU 120 is able to determine that the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) has ended and the display result has been derived based on receiving a pattern determination command from the game control microcomputer 100.

Figures 9-24 and 9-25 are flow charts showing the effect determination process executed at the start of the change. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process at the start of the change shown in Figures 9-24 and 9-25 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in Figure 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special pattern, it sets an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern based on the display result designation command and the variable pattern designation command, and determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the designated variable pattern by the effect determination process at the start of the change shown in Figures 9-24 and 9-25.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the performance mode is normal mode (step S05TM2010). If the performance mode is not normal mode (step S05TM2010: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM2170.

If the presentation mode is normal mode (step S05TM2010: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that accompanies a super reach (step S05TM2020). If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that does not accompany a super reach (step S05TM2020: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a super reach (step S05TM2020: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by either "SP-A1" or "SP-A2" (step S05TM2030). If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by neither "SP-A1" nor "SP-A2" (step S05TM2030: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM2070.

If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern involving either "SP-A1" or "SP-A2" (step S05TM2030: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot" or not (step S05TM2040). If the display result specified by the display result specification command is not "jackpot" (step S05TM2040: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as is.

If the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot" (step S05TM2040: YES), the performance control CPU 120. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is not a fluctuation pattern involving "SP-A1" (step S05TM2050: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM2260.

If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern that includes "SP-A1" (step S05TM2050: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the first normal time jackpot notification presentation (see Figures 9-32 and 9-33) described below (step S05TM2060), and ends the processing.

After step S05TM2030: NO, it is decided to execute the SP branching effect (see mountain in Figure 9-27 (4)) described below (step S05TM2070), and it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern that includes either "SP-B1" or "SP-B2" (step S05TM2080). If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern that does not include "SP-B1" or "SP-B2" (step S05TM2080: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM2130.

If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern involving either "SP-B1" or "SP-B2" (step S05TM2080: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a CU performance (see FIG. 9-31) described below based on a table (see FIG. 9-26(A)) for determining whether or not to execute a CU performance (step S05TM2090), and determines whether or not the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2100). If the display result specified by the display result specification command is not a "jackpot" (step S05TM2100: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot" (step S05TM2100: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern that includes "SP-B1" (step S05TM2110). If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern that does not include "SP-B1" (step S05TM2110: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM2260.

If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern that includes "SP-B1" (step S05TM2110: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the second normal time jackpot notification presentation (step S05TM2120) and ends the processing.

After step S05TM2080: NO, the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the story SP development performance (see Figures 9-28 to 9-30) described below (step S05TM2130), and determines whether the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot" (step S05TM2140). If the display result specified by the display result specification command is not a "jackpot" (step S05TM2140: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot" (step S05TM2140: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern that includes "SP-C1" (step S05TM2150). If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern that does not include "SP-C1" (step S05TM2150: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM2260.

If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern that includes "SP-C1" (step S05TM2150: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the third normal time jackpot notification presentation (step S05TM2160) and ends the processing.

After step S05TM2010: NO, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the performance mode is rush mode (step S05TM2170). If the performance mode is not rush mode (step S05TM2170: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the presentation mode is rush mode (step S05TM2170: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the presentation mode is rush mode: Dream Dream mode (see Figures 9-59 (1), (2A), (3A)) described below (step S05TM2180). If the presentation mode is not rush mode: Dream Dream mode (step S05TM2180: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM2210.

If the presentation mode is Rush Mode: Dream Dream Mode (step S05TM2180: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the display result specified by the display result designation command is "jackpot" (step S05TM2190). If the display result specified by the display result designation command is not "jackpot" (step S05TM2190: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot" (step S05TM2190: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines the presentation mode of the jackpot notification presentation when hitting right in Yume Yume mode based on a table for determining the presentation mode of the jackpot notification presentation when hitting right in Yume Yume mode (see Figure 9-26 (B1)), and ends the processing.

After step S05TM2180: NO, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the performance mode is the rush mode: nana mode (see Figures 9-59 (1), (2B), (3B)) described below (step S05TM2210). If the performance mode is not the rush mode: nana mode (step S05TM2210: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM2235.

If the presentation mode is Rush Mode: Nana Mode (step S05TM2210: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the display result specified by the display result designation command is "jackpot" or not (step S05TM2220). If the display result specified by the display result designation command is not "jackpot" (step S05TM2220: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot" (step S05TM2220: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines the presentation mode of the jackpot notification presentation when hitting the right in Nana mode based on a table for determining the presentation mode of the jackpot notification presentation when hitting the right in Nana mode (see Figure 9-26 (B2)), and ends the processing.

After step S05TM2210: NO (i.e., if the presentation mode is rush mode: jam mode (see Figures 9-59 (1), (2C), (3C)) described below), the presentation control CPU 120 determines that the presentation mode is rush mode: jam mode (step S05TM2235), and determines whether the display result specified by the display result designation command is "jackpot" (step S05TM2240). If the display result specified by the display result designation command is not "jackpot" (step S05TM2240: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot" (step S05TM2240: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines the presentation mode of the jackpot notification presentation when hitting the right in jam mode based on a table for determining the presentation mode of the jackpot notification presentation when hitting the right in jam mode (see Figure 9-26 (B3)) (step S05TM2250), and ends the processing.

Also, after step S05TM2050: NO, step S05TM2110: NO, or step S05TM2150: NO, the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the revival performance described below (step S05TM2260) and ends the processing.

[Tables referenced in the process of determining the performance at the start of fluctuation]
FIG. 9-26 is a specific example of a table referred to in any of the processes of the variation start performance determination process. FIG. 9-26(A) is an example of a CU performance execution/non-execution determination table referred to when determining whether or not to execute a CU performance in step S05TM2090. FIG. 9-26(B1) is an example of a performance mode determination table for a right-hit jackpot notification performance [for Yume Yume mode] referred to when determining the performance mode of a right-hit jackpot notification performance for Yume Yume mode in step S05TM2200. FIG. 9-26(B2) is an example of a performance mode determination table for a right-hit jackpot notification performance [for Nana mode] referred to when determining the performance mode of a right-hit jackpot notification performance for Nana mode in step S05TM2230. Figure 9-26 (B3) is an example of a presentation mode decision table for the right-hit jackpot notification presentation [for jam mode] that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the right-hit jackpot notification presentation for jam mode in step S05TM2250.

<CU performance execution decision table>
Fig. 9-26(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute a CU effect. As shown in Fig. 9-26(A), in this embodiment, a judgment value is allocated so that the execution rate of a CU effect differs depending on whether the display result is "miss" or "jackpot."

If the display result is a "miss" (i.e., the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "miss"), there is a 90% chance that a decision will be made not to execute the CU effect, and a 10% chance that a decision will be made to execute the CU effect.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot"), it is decided not to execute the CU effect 30% of the time, and to execute the CU effect 70% of the time.

In this way, the rate at which a CU effect is executed is higher when the display result is a "jackpot" than when the display result is a "miss," so the execution of a CU effect can suggest to the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot occurring.

<[Dream mode] Right hit jackpot notification effect presentation mode determination table>
Fig. 9-26 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for the right-hit jackpot notification presentation [for Dream Dream mode]. As shown in Fig. 9-26 (B1), in this embodiment, the judgment value is allocated so that the selection ratio of the presentation mode of the right-hit jackpot notification presentation differs depending on whether the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot".

When the jackpot type is a "3R jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "pattern 3R time-saving jackpot" or "3R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot"), it is decided that the first right-hit jackpot presentation (see Figure 9-70) described below will be executed 100% of the time.

When the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "10R time-saving jackpot with pattern" or "10R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot"), it is decided that there is a 50% chance that the jackpot presentation will be executed on the first right hit, and a 50% chance that the special jackpot presentation on the first right hit (see Figure 9-71) described below will be executed.

In this way, the special jackpot notification effect can be executed only when the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot", so at the timing when the special jackpot notification effect is executed when the first right hit, that is, before the jackpot type notification effect is executed, the player can recognize that the change will result in a "10R jackpot".

<[For Nana Mode] Right-hand hit jackpot notification presentation mode determination table>
Fig. 9-26 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for the right-hit jackpot notification presentation [for Nana mode]. As shown in Fig. 9-26 (B2), in this embodiment, the judgment value is allocated so that the selection ratio of the presentation mode of the right-hit jackpot notification presentation differs depending on whether the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot".

When the jackpot type is a "3R jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "3R time-saving jackpot with pattern" or "3R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot"), it is decided that the second right-hit jackpot presentation (see Figure 9-72) described below will be executed 100% of the time.

When the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "10R time-saving jackpot with pattern" or "10R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot"), it is decided that there is a 50% chance that the jackpot presentation will be executed on the second right hit, and there is a 50% chance that the special jackpot presentation on the second right hit (see Figure 9-73) described below will be executed.

In this way, the special jackpot notification effect can be executed only when the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot", so at the timing when the special jackpot notification effect is executed when the second right hit, that is, before the jackpot type notification effect is executed, the player can recognize that the change will result in a "10R jackpot".

<[Jam mode] Right hit jackpot notification effect presentation mode determination table>
Fig. 9-26 (B3) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for the right-hit jackpot notification presentation [for jam mode]. As shown in Fig. 9-26 (B3), in this embodiment, the judgment value is allocated so that the selection ratio of the presentation mode of the right-hit jackpot notification presentation differs depending on whether the jackpot type is "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot".

When the jackpot type is a "3R jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "3R time-saving jackpot with pattern" or "3R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot"), it is decided that the 3rd right-hit jackpot presentation (see Figure 9-74) described below will be executed 100% of the time.

When the jackpot type is "10R jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "10R time-saving jackpot with pattern" or "10R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot"), it is decided that there is a 50% chance that the jackpot presentation will be executed on the third right hit, and a 50% chance that the special jackpot presentation on the third right hit (see Figure 9-75) described below will be executed.

In this way, the special jackpot notification effect can be executed only when the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot", so at the timing when the special jackpot notification effect is executed when the third right hit, that is, before the jackpot type notification effect is executed, the player can recognize that the change will result in a "10R jackpot".

[SP Reach Production Development Flow]
Next, the development flow of the SP reach effect in this embodiment (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as the "SP development flow") will be described. In the example of the SP development flow shown in FIG. 9-27, after the reach state is established, a flow to develop into a challenge SP, a flow to develop into a battle SP, and a flow to develop into a story SP are shown.

In this state, the flow advances to the Challenge SP shown in Figures 9-27 (2) and (3), or to the Battle SP or Story SP shown in Figures 9-27 (4) and onwards.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (1), at the timing when a reach state should be established in a variable pattern involving various super reaches, the performance control CPU 120 stops and displays the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, thereby establishing a reach state, and displays the word "reach" at the top of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols continues in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. Also, the active display area ACE displays the normal active display AC.

(Flow that develops into Challenge SP)
As shown in Figure 9-27 (2), at the timing when the decorative patterns in a variable pattern involving a challenge SP should be temporarily stopped, the performance control CPU 120 temporarily displays a combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "232") indicating a "miss" in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 continues to execute the variable display of the special symbols, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. Also, the active display AC in the normal mode continues to be displayed in the active display area ACE.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (3), at the timing when a variation pattern including a Challenge SP should be developed into a Super Reach, the performance control CPU 120 executes the Challenge SP performance and causes the image display device 5 to display a Challenge SP start screen AI. The Challenge SP start screen AI is an image that includes a rock image and the words "Nana Challenge."

(Flow that develops into Battle SP or Story SP)
As shown in Fig. 9-27 (2), after the reach state in the variation pattern involving the battle SP or story SP is established, the performance control CPU 120 executes the SP branch performance and displays the SP branch screen DI on the image display device 5. The SP branch screen DI is an image including an effect display.

The SP branching effect is a display that teases which Super Reach a Battle SP or Story SP will develop into by displaying the SP branching screen DI before the Super Reach develops into either a Battle SP or Story SP.

(Flow that develops into Battle SP)
As shown in Fig. 9-27 (5), after the SP branching performance in the variation pattern with the battle SP is executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes the battle SP development performance and displays the battle SP development screen BDI on the image display device 5. The battle SP development screen BDI is an image including an effect display and the word "battle".

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (6), at the timing when a variation pattern involving a battle SP should develop into a super reach, the performance control CPU 120 executes a battle SP performance and causes the image display device 5 to display a battle SP start screen BSI. The battle SP start screen BSI is an image that includes character A, enemy character X, and the word "battle."

(Flow that develops into a story special)
As shown in FIG. 9-27(7), after the SP branching performance in the variation pattern with the story SP is executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes the story SP development performance and displays the story SP development screen SDI on the image display device 5. The story SP development screen SDI is an image including an effect display and the character A. Details of the story SP development performance will be described later in FIG. 9-28 to FIG. 9-30.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (8), at the timing when a variation pattern involving a Story SP should develop into a Super Reach, the performance control CPU 120 executes a Story SP performance and causes the image display device 5 to display a Story SP start screen SSI. The Story SP start screen SSI is an image that includes a story title display (in this example, "Yume Yume Story").

[Story SP development production]
In this embodiment, in a variation pattern involving a story SP, a story SP development performance can be executed after the SP branch performance. The story SP development performance is a series of performances consisting of (1) to (4) shown below.

(1) Story SP Development Production (First Stage)
In the story SP development performance (first stage), character A is displayed together with effects displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, character A's display color is the normal character color (e.g., hair is green, skin is flesh color, cape is red, etc.). At this time, performance sound G [first performance sound G and second performance sound G] "Powerful" is reproduced and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(2) Story SP development (second stage)
In the story SP development performance (second stage), a blackout image BOI is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance sound G is being reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but is being muted.

In addition, without being limited to the above embodiment, when the story SP development performance (first stage), (third stage), and (fourth stage) are executed, the channel setting ratio of the performance sound G played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R may be set to 100%, while when the story SP development performance (second stage) is executed, the channel setting ratio of the performance sound G played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R may be set to 20%, thereby reducing the clarity of the performance sound G in the story SP development performance (second stage).

(3) Story SP Development Production (Third Stage)
In the story SP development performance (third stage), character A is displayed together with the effect display on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the display color of character A as a whole is yellow. In addition, performance sound G [first performance sound G] "Pa" is reproduced and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, character A continues to be displayed on the entire screen of image display device 5 along with the effect display. At this time, the display color of character A as a whole changes from yellow to purple, which is a complementary color to yellow. In addition, the sound effect G [first sound effect G] "Pa" is played back and output continuously from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, character A continues to be displayed on the entire screen of image display device 5 along with the effect display. At this time, the display color of character A as a whole changes from purple to yellow, which is a complementary color to purple. In addition, the sound effect G [first sound effect G] "Pa" is played back and output continuously from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, character A continues to be displayed on the entire screen of image display device 5 along with the effect display. At this time, the display color of character A as a whole changes from yellow to purple, which is a complementary color to yellow. In addition, the sound effect G [first sound effect G] "Pa" is played back and output continuously from speakers 8L and 8R.

(4) Story SP development (fourth stage)
In the story SP development performance (fourth stage), the character A is enlarged and displayed together with the effect display on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the display color of the character A is the normal character color. At this time, the performance sound G [first performance sound G and second performance sound G] "Powerful" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the Story SP development performance (third and fourth stages), the scratch process is executed to play and output the first performance sound G "Pa" four times in succession from speakers 8L and 8R, and then the first performance sound G and the second performance sound G "Powerful" are played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, each time the yellow character A and the purple character A are alternately displayed on the image display device 5, the first sound effect G "Pa" is scratch-processed and played back four times in a row from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 9-4, in the fluctuation patterns with Super Reach, the expectation of a jackpot is higher in the relationship of fluctuation patterns with Challenge SP < fluctuation patterns with Story SP, so the development route with a higher expectation of a jackpot is when the SP branching effect develops into Story SP than when the SP branching effect develops into Battle SP. In other words, the development route with a higher expectation of a jackpot is when the SP branching effect is followed by a Story SP development effect than when the SP branching effect is followed by a Battle SP development effect. In this way, the Story SP development effect is a type of in-flux preview effect that notifies players that the reach effect will develop into Super Reach, which has the highest expectation of a jackpot.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, were alternately displayed in the story SP development presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this form. In the story SP development presentation, a character A with a different display form from the two types of characters A, the yellow character A and the purple character A, may be displayed.

For example, in a story SP development presentation, three types of character A may be displayed in sequence: a yellow character A, a red character A, and a blue character A.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the display size of the characters A is the same when two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are alternately displayed in the story SP development presentation, but this is not limited to the above. In the story SP development presentation, the display size of the characters A does not have to be the same when two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are alternately displayed.

For example, in a story SP development performance, when two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are displayed alternately, the display size of the yellow character A may be small and the display size of the purple character A may be large.

In the example shown, when two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are alternately displayed in the story SP development presentation, the display poses of the characters A are the same. However, this is not the only possible form. When two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are alternately displayed in the story SP development presentation, the display poses of the characters A do not have to be the same.

In this case, when characters are alternately displayed in the Story SP development presentation, it is possible to display characters in different display poses, but when characters are alternately displayed in the Story SP development presentation, it is not possible to display different types of characters.

<Examples of story special development production>
9-28 to 9-30 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the image and sound of each effect related to the story SP development effect. In this example, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a normal state, the story SP development effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (1), at the timing when the story SP development performance should start after the SP branch performance in the variation pattern is executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes the story SP development performance (first stage) and displays the story SP development screen SDI on the image display device 5. The story SP development screen SDI is an image including an effect display and character A. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the character (A) in the normal character color (e.g., hair is green, skin is flesh color, cape is red, etc.). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs the performance sound G [first performance sound G and second performance sound G] "Powerful" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 also starts the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (2), at the timing when the story SP development performance (second stage) in the variation pattern should start, the performance control CPU 120 executes the story SP development performance (second stage) and displays a blackout image BOI on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 is playing and outputting the performance sound G from the speakers 8L and 8R, but is also executing a mute process.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (3), at the timing when the story SP development performance (third stage) in the variation pattern should start, the performance control CPU 120 executes the story SP development performance (third stage), erases the blackout image BOI from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character (A) CA together with the effect display EFI. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire character (A) in a yellow display color. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs the performance sound G [first performance sound G] "Pa" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (4), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the story SP development performance (third stage), and continues to display the character (A) CA together with the effect display EFI. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire character (A) in purple, which is a complementary color to yellow. The performance control CPU 120 also plays and outputs the performance sound G [first performance sound G] "Pa" continuously from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (5), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the story SP development performance (third stage), and continues to display the character (A) CA together with the effect display EFI. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire character (A) in the display color yellow, which is a complementary color contrast to purple. The performance control CPU 120 also plays and outputs the performance sound G [first performance sound G] "Pa" continuously from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (6), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the story SP development performance (third stage), and continues to display the character (A) CA together with the effect display EFI. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire character (A) in purple, which is a complementary color to yellow. The performance control CPU 120 also plays and outputs the performance sound G [first performance sound G] "Pa" continuously from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (7), at the timing when the story SP development performance (fourth stage) in the variation pattern should start, the performance control CPU 120 executes the story SP development performance (fourth stage) and displays the enlarged character (A) CA together with the effect display EFI on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the character (A) in the normal character display color. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs the performance sound G [first performance sound G and second performance sound G] "Powerful" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (8), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into a super reach, the performance control CPU 120 executes a story SP performance and causes the image display device 5 to display a story SP start screen SSI. The story SP start screen SSI is an image that includes a story title display (in this example, "Yume Yume Story").

As shown in Figures 9-28(3) to 9-29(6), when the story SP development performance is executed, a scratch process is executed in which the first performance sound G "Pa" is scratched four times each time character A, whose display color is yellow, and character A, whose display color is purple and has a complementary color relationship with yellow, are displayed, and the performance sound G is played and output.

[CU Directing]
In this embodiment, in the battle SP performance, the period from the start of the battle SP performance to the timing of the win/loss branch is referred to as the "battle SP first half", and the period from the timing of the win/loss branch to the end of the battle SP performance is referred to as the "battle SP second half". In this embodiment, at a timing before the display result is notified when the battle SP performance is being executed (a predetermined timing in the battle SP first half), a CU performance that suggests that the variable display has a high jackpot expectation can be executed. The CU performance is a performance in which the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position on the battle start screen in the battle SP performance. At this time, the performance sound B is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Hereinafter, the CU performance will be referred to as the "first movable body performance" as appropriate.

<Examples of CU production>
9-31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image and the effect sound of each effect related to the CU effect. In this example, an example is shown in which the CU effect is executed when the battle SP effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (1), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into a super reach (battle SP), the performance control CPU 120 executes the battle SP performance and causes the image display device 5 to display the battle SP start screen BSI. The battle SP start screen BSI is an image that includes a character (A) CA, an enemy character (X) CX, and the word "battle."

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2), at the timing when the CU performance should be executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes the CU performance and moves the movable body YM from the initial position to the second operating position. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs the performance sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R.

When the movable body YM is in the second operating position, the image display device 5 is located behind the movable body YM (towards the gaming machine), so the visibility of the performance images related to the battle SP displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (3), at the timing when the CU performance should end, the performance control CPU 120 ends the CU performance and moves the movable body YM from the second operating position to the initial position. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the battle SP start screen BSI on the image display device 5 and displays the in-battle screen BEI. The in-battle screen is an image that includes the character (A) CA and the enemy character (X) CX.

[Big hit notification effect]
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a jackpot notification effect that notifies the user that the display result in the variable display is a "jackpot." In this embodiment, the jackpot notification effect includes a normal jackpot notification effect that can be executed in the normal mode, and a right-hit jackpot notification effect that can be executed in the rush mode.

[Normal big win notification effect]
In this embodiment, the normal time jackpot notification effects include a first normal time jackpot notification effect, a second normal time jackpot notification effect, and a third normal time jackpot notification effect.

[First normal time big win notification effect]
The first normal time jackpot notification effect is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when the display result is notified when the presentation mode is the normal mode and the variation pattern is "SP-A1 jackpot". The first normal time jackpot notification effect is an effect included in the success presentation. The first normal time jackpot notification effect is a success notification screen that notifies the user that the challenge has been successful (i.e., the display result is "jackpot") at a predetermined opportunity during the challenge SP (such as the operation of the push button 31B or the passage of a predetermined period of time) and is displayed on the image display device 5. The success notification screen is an image that includes the characters "jackpot" and "COMPLETE". On the success notification screen, the display color of white and the display color of black, which is in a complementary color contrast with white, are alternately displayed.

In the first normal jackpot notification effect, a scratch process is executed to play and output the first sound effect C1 "K" four times in succession from speakers 8L and 8R, and then the first sound effect C1 and the second sound effect C1 "Complete" are played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, each time the display color of the success notification screen is switched between white and black, the first sound effect C1 is scratched and played from speakers 8L and 8R (see Figures 9-32 and 9-33), so the sound effect C1 is played as "Ko, ko, ko, ko, complete."

<Example of the first normal big win notification effect>
9-32 to 9-33 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the image and sound of each effect related to the first normal time big win notification effect. In this example, an example is shown in which the first normal time big win notification effect is executed when the challenge SP effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (1), at the timing when the operation prompt display in the variable pattern should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the operation prompt display BT in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, prompting the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, push button 31B).

In this example, the operation prompting display BT is formed by adding the words "PRESS!!" and a downward arrow above an object that resembles the push button 31B, and adding a time bar indicating the validity period of the operation below the object that resembles the push button 31B. Here, because a smoke image SMI is displayed in the background of the operation prompting display BT, the player operates the operation part in the hope that operating the operation part will clear the smoke and the challenge will be successful.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs performance sound I2 "Push" (character B voice) from speakers 8L and 8R. Since the Challenge SP performance currently being performed is a performance in which character (B) mainly appears, the performance sound when the operation prompt display is displayed is a performance sound related to character (B) (character (B)'s character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the first normal time jackpot notification presentation (success presentation), and causes the image display device 5 to display the success notification screen SNI1 (in this example, an image including the characters "jackpot" and "COMPLETE"). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the success notification screen SNI to be displayed in black. The presentation control CPU 120 also causes the first presentation sound C1 "ko" to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (3), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal time jackpot notification performance (success performance), and causes the image display device 5 to display the success notification screen SNI2 (in this example, an image including the characters "jackpot" and "COMPLETE"). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the success notification screen SNI to be displayed in white, which is a complementary color to black. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the first performance sound C1 "ko" to be played continuously from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (4), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal time jackpot notification performance (success performance), and causes the image display device 5 to display the success notification screen SNI1 (in this example, an image including the characters "jackpot" and "COMPLETE"). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the success notification screen SNI to be displayed in black, which is a complementary color contrast to white. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the first performance sound C1 "ko" to be played continuously from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (5), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal time jackpot notification performance (success performance), and causes the image display device 5 to display the success notification screen SNI2 (in this example, an image including the characters "jackpot" and "COMPLETE"). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the success notification screen SNI to be displayed in white, which is a complementary color to black. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the first performance sound C1 "ko" to be played continuously from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the first normal time jackpot notification presentation (success presentation), and causes the image display device 5 to display the success notification screen SNI1 (in this example, an image including the words "jackpot" and "COMPLETE"). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the first presentation sound C1 and the second presentation sound C1 "Complete" to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 9-32(2) to 9-33(5), when the first normal time jackpot notification effect is executed and the effect sound C1 is played, a scratch process is executed in which the first effect sound C1 "K" is scratched four times.

[Second normal time big win notification effect]
The second normal time big win notification performance is a type of big win notification performance executed when the display result is notified when the performance mode is the normal mode and the variation pattern is "SP-B1 big win". The second normal time big win notification performance is a performance included in the victory performance. In the second normal time big win notification performance, a victory notification screen that notifies the user that the battle has been won (i.e., the display result is "big win") is displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined opportunity (such as the operation of the push button 31B or the passage of a predetermined period of time) during the latter half of the battle SP. The victory notification screen is an image that includes the word "victory", a character (A), and a combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win. In this embodiment. In the second normal time big win notification performance, the victory notification screen and a blackout image are displayed alternately.

In the second normal jackpot notification effect, a scratch process is executed to play and output the first sound effect C2 "Vi" four times in succession from speakers 8L and 8R, and then the first sound effect C2 and the second sound effect C2 "Victory" are played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, each time the victory notification screen is displayed, the first sound effect C2 is scratched and played back from speakers 8L and 8R (see Figures 9-34 to 9-37), so sound effect C2 is played back as "Vi, Vi, Vi, Vi, Victory."

In addition, in the second normal time jackpot notification performance, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position. When the second normal time jackpot notification performance starts, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position, and when the second normal time jackpot notification performance ends, the movable body YM moves from the second operating position to the initial position.

<Example of the second normal big win notification effect>
9-34 to 9-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the image and sound of each effect related to the second normal time big win notification effect. In this example, an example is shown in which the second normal time big win notification effect is executed when the battle SP effect is being executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (1), at the timing when the operation prompt display in the variable pattern should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the operation prompt display BT in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, prompting the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, push button 31B).

In this example, the operation prompting display BT is formed by adding the words "PRESS!!" and a downward arrow above an object that resembles push button 31B, and adding a time bar indicating the valid period of the operation below the object that resembles push button 31B. Here, because an ally character (A) CA and an enemy character (X) CX are displayed in the background of the operation prompting display BT, the player operates the operation part in the hope that operating the operation part will cause the ally character (A) to defeat the enemy character (X).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs performance sound I1 "Push" (character A's voice) from speakers 8L and 8R. Since the ongoing battle SP performance is one in which character (A) mainly appears, the performance sound when the operation prompt display is displayed is a performance sound related to character (A) (character (A)'s character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the second normal time jackpot notification presentation (victory presentation), and causes the image display device 5 to display a victory notification screen WNI (in this example, an image including the word "victory", a character (A), and a combination of decorative patterns indicating a jackpot). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the first presentation sound C2 "V" to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The presentation control CPU 120 also moves the movable body YM from the initial position to the second operating position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (3), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the second normal time jackpot notification presentation (victory presentation) and causes the image display device 5 to display the blackout image BOI. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 plays and outputs the first presentation sound C1 "V" from the speakers 8L and 8R, but executes a mute process. In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to position the movable body YM in the second operating position.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figures 9-34(4) to 9-36(9) are the same as those in Figures 9-34(2) and (3) described above, so a description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-34(3), the period during which the first blackout image BOI is displayed in the second normal time jackpot notification presentation (hereinafter referred to as the "blackout period") is 0.5S, as shown in FIG. 9-35(5), the period during which the second blackout image BOI is displayed in the second normal time jackpot notification presentation is 0.4S, as shown in FIG. 9-36(7), the period during which the third blackout image BOI is displayed in the second normal time jackpot notification presentation is 0.3S, and as shown in FIG. 9-36(9), the period during which the fourth blackout image BOI is displayed in the second normal time jackpot notification presentation is 0.2S.

In this way, by gradually shortening the blackout period, i.e., by shortening the period until the first sound effect C2 "V", is played, the interest of the second normal time jackpot notification effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (10), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the second normal time jackpot notification presentation (victory presentation), and causes the image display device 5 to display the victory notification screen WNI (in this example, an image including the word "Victory", the character (A), and a combination of decorative patterns indicating a jackpot). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the first presentation sound C2 and the second presentation sound C2 "Victory" to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The presentation control CPU 120 also continues to position the movable body YM in the second operating position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (11), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the second normal time jackpot notification presentation (victory presentation), and causes the image display device 5 to display the victory notification screen WNI (in this example, an image including the word "victory", the character (A), and a combination of decorative patterns indicating a jackpot). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the second operating position to the initial position.

[Third normal time big win notification effect]
The third normal time big win notification performance is a type of big win notification performance executed when the display result is notified when the performance mode is the normal mode and the variation pattern is "SP-C1 big win". The third normal time big win notification performance is a performance included in the achievement performance. In the third normal time big win notification performance, an achievement notification screen is displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined opportunity (such as the operation of the push button 31B, the passage of a predetermined period of time, etc.) during the story SP to notify that the story has been achieved (i.e., the display result is "big win"). The achievement notification screen is an image including the word "Congratulations" and characters (A) to (C). In this embodiment. In the third normal time big win notification performance, the achievement notification screen and a blackout image are displayed alternately.

In the third normal jackpot notification effect, a scratch process is executed to play and output the first sound effect C3 "K" four times in succession from speakers 8L and 8R, and then the first sound effect C3 and the second sound effect C3 "Graturation" are played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, each time the achievement notification screen is displayed, the first sound effect C3 is scratched and played back from the speakers 8L and 8R (see Figures 9-38 to 9-41), so that the sound effect C3 is played back as "Ko, ko, ko, ko, congratulations."

In addition, in the third normal time jackpot notification performance, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position. When the third normal time jackpot notification performance starts, the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position, and when the third normal time jackpot notification performance ends, the movable body YM moves from the second operating position to the initial position.

<Example of the third normal big win notification effect>
9-38 to 9-41 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the image and sound of each effect related to the third normal time big win notification effect. In this example, an example is shown in which the third normal time big win notification effect is executed when the story SP effect is being executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (1), at the timing when the operation prompt display in the variable pattern should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompt display BT in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, prompting the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, push button 31B). At this time, a spiral effect display UEFI is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, with the operation prompt display BT at its center, and the title display of this story SP (in this example, the words "Yume Yume Story") is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this example, the operation prompting display BT is formed by adding the words "PRESS!!" and a downward arrow above an object that resembles push button 31B, and adding a time bar indicating the validity period of the operation below the object that resembles push button 31B. Here, because a spiral effect display UEFI that temporarily interrupts the story video is displayed in the background of the operation prompting display BT, the player operates the operation part in the hope of achieving the story by operating the operation part.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs performance sound I4 "Push" (the voices of the three characters, A to C) from speakers 8L, 8R. Since the story SP performance currently being performed is one in which character (A) mainly appears, with characters (B) and (C) also appearing, the performance sounds when the operation prompt display is displayed are the performance sounds related to characters (A), (B) and (C) (the voices of the three characters, character (A), character (B) and character (C)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), when the player operates the operation unit, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the third normal time jackpot notification presentation (achievement presentation), and causes the image display device 5 to display the achievement notification screen ANI (in this example, an image including the word "Congratulations" and characters (A) to (C)). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the first presentation sound C3 "K" to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The presentation control CPU 120 also moves the movable body YM from the initial position to the second operating position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (3), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the third normal time jackpot notification presentation (achievement presentation) and causes the image display device 5 to display the blackout image BOI. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 plays and outputs the first presentation sound C3 "K" from the speakers 8L and 8R, but executes a mute process. In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to position the movable body YM in the second operating position.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figures 9-38(4) to 9-40(9) are the same as those in Figures 9-38(2) and (3) described above, so a description will be omitted.

Also, as shown in Figure 9-38 (3), the blackout period during the third normal time jackpot notification presentation is 0.5 S, as shown in Figure 9-39 (5), the blackout period during the third normal time jackpot notification presentation is 0.4 S, as shown in Figure 9-40 (7), the blackout period during the third normal time jackpot notification presentation is 0.3 S, and as shown in Figure 9-40 (9), the fourth blackout period during the third normal time jackpot notification presentation is 0.2 S.

In this way, by gradually shortening the blackout period, i.e., by shortening the period until the first sound effect C3 "K" is played, the interest of the third normal time jackpot notification effect can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (10), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the third normal time jackpot notification presentation (achievement presentation) and causes the image display device 5 to display the achievement notification screen ANI. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the first presentation sound C3 and the second presentation sound C3 "Complete" to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The presentation control CPU 120 also continues to position the movable body YM in the second operating position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (11), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the third normal time big win notification presentation (victory presentation) and causes the image display device 5 to display the achievement notification screen ANI. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the second operating position to the initial position.

[Premium effect (sudden big win announcement effect)]
In this embodiment, when the special pattern is undergoing a changing display, a premium effect (sudden jackpot announcement effect) can be executed to announce that the display result is a "jackpot" at a time when it should not normally be announced (when the change starts, when a reach is reached, etc.).

When the premium effect starts to change or when a reach is achieved, a sound effect K is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R. This sound effect K is a different sound effect from the sound effect of the normal jackpot notification effect described above (sound effect C1, sound effect C2, sound effect C3) and the sound effect of the right-hit jackpot notification effect described above (sound effect D1, sound effect D2, sound effect D3), and is referred to as the "sudden jackpot notification sound" or the "premium sound" as appropriate.

[Revival performance]
In this embodiment, after the display result in the SP performance is notified (provisional notification of a miss), a revival performance can be executed to notify that the final display result is a "jackpot." As described in the explanation of the variation patterns, the revival performance can be executed in any variation pattern involving a super reach among the challenge SP, the battle SP, and the story SP.

The revival performance is a series of performances as shown below.
First, the first revival display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The first revival display is composed of the letters "FE", which are the first two letters of "FEVER", indicating a "big win", and a character (A) is displayed inside the first revival display. The display color of the entire first revival display is white. In addition, the performance sound J [first performance sound J] "fee" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a second revival display, which is a larger image than the first revival display, is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The second revival display is composed of the letters "FE", which are the first two letters of "FEVER", indicating a "jackpot", and a character (A) is shown inside the second revival display. The display color of the entire second revival display is black, which is a complementary color contrast to white. In addition, the sound effect J [first sound effect J] "fee" is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the first revival display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The display color of the entire first revival display is white, which is a complementary color to black. In addition, the sound effect J [first sound effect J] "phi" is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the second revival display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The display color of the entire second revival display is black, which is a complementary color contrast to white. In addition, the performance sound J [first performance sound J] "phi" is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the third revival display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The third revival display is composed of the word "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot", and a character (A) is shown inside the third revival display. The entire third revival display is displayed in white. In addition, the sound effect J [first sound effect J and second sound effect J] "Fever" is played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, each time the first revival display and the second revival display are displayed, the first sound effect J is scratched and played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see Figures 9-42 to 9-44), so the sound effect J is played and output as "fi, fi, fi, fi, fever."

In this embodiment, the letters "FE" and "FEVER" are composed only of the outlines of the letters, and the insides of the letters are not filled in, so that objects placed in the area inside the letters are visible on a display layer behind the letters. The first revival display, second revival display, and third revival display are configured with a priority of the display layer of character A < the display layer of the letters "FE" and "FEVER", so that character A placed in the area inside the letters "FE" and "FEVER" is partially visible.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the first revival display and the second revival display, which has a larger display size than the first revival display, are alternately displayed in the revival performance, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the revival performance does not have to alternate between the first revival display and the second revival display, which has a larger display size than the first revival display.

For example, in the revival performance, a first revival display, a second revival display having a larger display size than the first revival display, a third revival display having a larger display size than the second revival display, and a fourth revival display having a larger display size than the third revival display may be displayed in that order.

<Examples of revival performances>
9-42 to 9-44 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the image and sound of each effect related to the revival effect. In this example, an example is shown in which the revival effect is executed when the defeat effect is executed during the battle SP effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), at the timing when the defeat effect in the variation pattern should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the defeat effect and causes the image display device 5 to display a defeat notification screen LNI (in this example, an image including the word "Defeat", an enemy character (X), and the combination of decorative symbols "323" indicating a loss).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), at the timing when the revival performance in the variation pattern should be executed, the performance control CPU 120 ends the defeat performance and executes the revival performance, causing the first revival display REI1 (in this example, an image including the letters "FE") to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the entire first revival display to be displayed in white. The performance control CPU 120 also causes the performance sound J [first performance sound J] "fee" to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), the performance control CPU 120 continues executing the revival performance and displays the second revival display REI2 (in this example, an image including the letters "FE") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire second revival display in black, which is a complementary color to white. The performance control CPU 120 also plays and outputs the performance sound J [first performance sound J] "fee" continuously from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figures 9-43 (4) and (5) are similar to those in Figures 9-42 (2) and (3) described above, so a description will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (6), the performance control CPU 120 continues executing the revival performance and displays the third revival display REI3 (in this example, an image including the word "FEVER") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire third revival display in white. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs the performance sound J [first performance sound J and second performance sound J] "Fever" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (7), at the timing when the victory effect should be executed in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 ends the revival effect and executes the victory effect. The effect image at this time is the same as that shown in FIG. 9-37 (11), so the explanation is omitted.

[Round display]
In this embodiment, in the jackpot game state or the small win game state, a round display showing the round number of the jackpot round game or the round number of the jackpot round game via the small win including the small win can be displayed in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5. Hereinafter, the period of the jackpot round game is appropriately referred to as the "jackpot round period".

[In case of winning pattern]
In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is a pattern jackpot,
The round display indicates the number of jackpot rounds.
For example, if the jackpot type is a "10R time-saving jackpot," the first round of the jackpot game will be displayed as "1 ROUND," and the tenth round of the jackpot game will be displayed as "10 ROUND."

[In the case of a big win via a small win]
In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is a small jackpot,
(1) Small win game: Round display = 1 ROUND
(2) Jackpot game: Round display = Jackpot round number + 1
It is as follows.
For example, if the jackpot type is a "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot," the small jackpot game will be displayed as a round display = "1 ROUND," the first round of the jackpot game will be displayed as a round display = "2 ROUND," and the ninth round of the jackpot game will be displayed as a round display = "10 ROUND."

[Music during the jackpot round]
In this embodiment, in a jackpot game, the player can select the music to be played during the jackpot round. Specifically, if the V-stock effect is not executed during the jackpot, the player can arbitrarily select the music to be played during the jackpot round from among music A to music C.

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a special operation unit (in this example, a cross key (not shown) provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1). During the period when a song can be selected during a jackpot game, only the left and right keys of the special operation unit can be operated, and the song changes when the player operates the left and right keys of the special operation unit.

In addition, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a special operation prompting display BT2 (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) is displayed to prompt the player to operate the special operation section, and a song display (an object resembling a musical note, the name of the song being played (selected)) showing information about the currently selected song.

In this embodiment, even during a jackpot round, there are cases where a song cannot be selected, such as when a V-stock effect described below is executed. In such cases, the special operation prompt display BT2 is not displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, thereby making the player aware that a song cannot be selected.

In this embodiment, only the left and right keys of the special operation section can be operated, so the special operation promotion display BT2 is displayed in a manner indicating that only the left and right keys of the special operation section can be operated (only the left and right keys are colored).

<Example of round display>
Figures 9-45 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of presentation images of each presentation related to the round display.

<Example of the round display of the winning pattern>
FIG. 9-45(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image of each presentation related to the round display when a symbol jackpot occurs. In this example, an example of the round display being displayed when the jackpot type is a "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" is shown.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-45(A):(1), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a normal jackpot round game image OAI. This jackpot round game image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "1 ROUND"), a prize ball count display showing the total number of awarded prize balls (in this example, the characters "00000pt"), and a normal jackpot background image (a background image including a mountain, the sun, and musical notes).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to win a prize at the second start prize opening, the large prize opening, or the V prize opening (here, the large prize opening).

The performance control CPU 120 also displays a special operation prompt display BT2 and a song display (in this example, an object resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A") in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

<Example of round display of a big win via a small win>
FIG. 9-45(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image of each effect related to the round display when a small win or a jackpot via a small win occurs. In this example, an example is shown in which the round display is displayed when a small win, a V prize, and a jackpot occur, with the small win jackpot type being "Pattern 3 (2) R Time Shortening Jackpot."

First, as shown in FIG. 9-45(B):(1), when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a small win game image KI. This small win game image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "1 Round"), a big win right hit promotion image that includes the characters "Aim for the V Attacker!!" to enter the V winning hole and an arrow image instructing a right hit, and an image that includes an ally character (A).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to win a prize at the second start prize opening, the large prize opening, or the V prize opening (here, the V prize opening).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-45(B):(2), when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the performance control CPU 120 displays a V winning occurrence display VI (in this example, the letters "V GET") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-45(B):(3), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a normal jackpot round game image OAI. This jackpot round game image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "2ROUND"), a prize ball count display showing the total number of awarded prize balls (in this example, the characters "00600pt"), and a normal jackpot background image.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 constantly displays a right-hit prompting image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a special operation prompting display BT2 and a song display (in this example, an object resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A") in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

[Continuous Hold Performance]
In this embodiment, when reserved information determined to be controlled to a "hit" (either a "big hit" or a "small hit") is stored in the reserved memory buffer RAM 122, it is referred to as a "reserved series". In this embodiment, among the reserved information stored when a big hit occurs, there is reserved information that will become a "hit" in the future, and it is possible to execute a reserved series performance that notifies that the next "hit" will occur consecutively within the range of the reserved information stored at the time of the big hit during the big hit game state or the time-saving state. In addition, if the display result of the reserved information is a "small hit", it will be a big hit via a small hit based on the occurrence of a V prize, so it can be said that the reserved information of the small hit is reserved memory information of a hit that will become a big hit in the future.

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period will be referred to as the "jackpot FF period" as appropriate, the jackpot round period will be referred to as the "jackpot RD period" as appropriate, and the jackpot ending period will be referred to as the "jackpot ED period" as appropriate.

There are two types of consecutive hold effects: a first consecutive hold effect and a second consecutive hold effect. The first consecutive hold effect is an effect that notifies the player that consecutive wins will occur at a specific timing when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (in this example, during the jackpot FF period or the jackpot RD period). The second consecutive hold effect is an effect that notifies the player that consecutive wins will occur at a specific timing when the game is controlled to a time-saving state (in this example, the period from when the game is controlled to the time-saving state until the win variable display that is the target of the consecutive hold effect begins).

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of second reserved memories is "4", so if the display result of all reserved memories is "win", the maximum value of the number of reserved consecutive wins, which is the number of consecutive reserved wins, is "4".

[Next confirmed performance]
In this embodiment, when a jackpot occurs, the type of jackpot is a "next confirmed jackpot" with a time-saving control count of 99 times ("10R pattern time-saving jackpot" (99 times) or "10 (9) time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" (99 times)), and it is possible to execute a next confirmed effect that notifies players that the next "hit" will occur consecutively during the jackpot game state or the time-saving state, which is controlled after the jackpot game state ends. Hereinafter, the case where the next "hit" occurs consecutively is referred to as a "next consecutive".

There are two types of next confirmation effects: a first next confirmation effect and a second next confirmation effect. The first next confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a hit will occur substantially continuously at a predetermined timing when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (in this example, the jackpot FF period or the jackpot RD period). The second next confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a hit will occur substantially continuously at a predetermined timing when the game is controlled to a time-saving state (in this example, the period from when the game is controlled to the time-saving state until the next hit variable display starts).

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of second reserved memories is "4", so if the jackpot type of the jackpot in question and the jackpot types of all reserved memories are "guaranteed next jackpot", the maximum value of the next consecutive number, which is the number of next consecutive wins, is "5".

[V Stock Effects]
In this embodiment, when there is at least one of the "reserved consecutive" or "next consecutive", it is appropriately referred to as "V stock" or "a hit is stocked". In this embodiment, the performance form of the reserved consecutive performance and the next fixed performance is common, and the execution timing of the reserved consecutive performance and the next fixed performance is also common, so the reserved consecutive performance and the next fixed performance are referred to as "V stock performance".

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the second reserved memory count is "4", so the maximum value of the V stock count (reserved consecutive count or next consecutive count), which is the number of V stocks, is "5".

As shown in FIG. 9-46, the first reserved consecutive performance and the first next confirmed performance executed in the jackpot game state are referred to as the "first V stock performance," and the second reserved consecutive performance and the second next confirmed performance executed in the time-saving state are referred to as the "second V stock performance."

<First V Stock>
Among the V stock effects, the first V stock effect (first pending consecutive effect, first next confirmed effect) is a series of effects as shown below.

First, at a predetermined timing when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, the first V stock display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The first V stock display is composed of the letter "V", which is the initial letter of "V STOCK" indicating that the game is V-stocked, and a character (A) is displayed inside the first V stock display. The first V stock display has a display color of white throughout the first V stock display. At this time, the sound effect A [first sound effect A] "bu" is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the song X [song data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and song data X2] "We, we, we, we, welcome lucky (omitted)" is also played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, the channel setting ratio of the sound effect A played and output from speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%, while the channel setting ratio of the music X played and output from speakers 8L and 8R is set to 20%, thereby reducing the clarity of music X and improving the clarity of the sound effect A. Also, if any of the music (music A to C) is being played and output before the first V stock effect is executed, the playback and output of that music is terminated and the playback and output of music X is started. In other words, music X, which is the music related to the first V stock effect, is played and output in priority over other music.

Next, a second V stock display, which is an image larger than the first V stock display, is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The second V stock display is composed of the letter "V", which is the initial letter of "V STOCK" indicating that the item is V-stocked, and a character (A) is displayed inside the second V stock display. The display color of the entire second V stock display is black, which is a complementary color contrast to white. At this time, sound effect A [first sound effect A] "bu" is continuously played and output from speakers 8L and 8R. Also, song X [song data X2] is continuously played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the first V stock display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The display color of the entire first V stock display is white. At this time, the sound effect A [first sound effect A] "bu" is continuously played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the song X [song data X2] is also continuously played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the second V stock display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The display color of the entire second V stock display is black, which is a complementary color to white. At this time, the sound effect A [first sound effect A] "bu" is continuously played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the song X [song data X2] is also continuously played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the third V stock display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The third V stock display is composed of the letters "V STOCK" indicating that V stock has been performed, and a character (A) is displayed inside the third V stock display. In the third V stock display, the display color of the letter "V" is white, and the display color of the letter "STOCK" is black. In addition, sound effect A [first sound effect A and second sound effect A] "V stock" is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, music X [music data X2] is also continuously played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, each time the first V stock display and the second V stock display are displayed, the first sound effect A is scratched and played back from the speakers 8L and 8R, so sound effect A is played back as "Bu, bu, bu, bu, bu, bu stock" (see Figures 9-51 and 9-52).

Next, an operation prompt display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, song X [song data X2] is continuously played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, at a predetermined trigger (such as operation of push button 31B or the passage of a predetermined period of time), the V stock number display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The V stock number display is composed of the rainbow colored letter "V", the black letter "STOCK", and the letter "x [V stock number]". The [V stock number] portion of "x [V stock number]" displays a number from "1" to "5" depending on the V stock number. At this time, song X [song data X2] is being continuously played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a special big win round game image OBI is displayed on the image display device 5. This big win round game image is an image that includes a round display, a winning ball count display, a special big win background image (a background image including character A, character B, and character C), a rainbow-colored caption display, and a reduced V stock count display.

At this time, song X [song data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and song data X2] "Weh, weh, weh, weh, welcome lucky (omitted)" is being continuously played and output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the channel setting ratio of song X played and output from speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%, improving the clarity of song X.

The first V stock effect ends when the jackpot game state ends. In the first V stock effect during the jackpot RD period, the special jackpot round game image OBI is continuously displayed on the image display device 5. In the first V stock effect of the final round in the jackpot RD period, a rainbow-colored caption display and a V stock number display are superimposed on the jackpot final round game image OLI. In the first V stock during the jackpot ED period, only the rainbow-colored caption display is continuously displayed on the upper right and lower left parts of the screen of the image display device 5. The jackpot ED period is the period during which the time-saving entry effect described below is executed, so the rainbow-colored caption display is superimposed on the effect image of the time-saving entry effect.

<Second V Stock>
Among the V stock effects, the second V stock effect (second pending consecutive effect, second next confirmed effect) is a series of effects as shown below.

First, at the timing when control to the time-saving state is started, a special time-saving background image is displayed as a background image on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9-63). This special time-saving background image is an image including the letters "Powerful RUSH", the performance mode emblems (the "Yume Yume Mode" emblem, the "Nana Mode" emblem, and the "Jam Mode" emblem), a rainbow-colored caption display, a reduced V stock count display, and each character (Character A, Character B, Character C). The special time-saving background images include a first special time-saving background image (compatible with Yume Yume Mode), a second special time-saving background image (compatible with Nana Mode), and a third special time-saving background image (compatible with Jam Mode).

At this time, a special active display guide ACG for displaying the active display is displayed in the active display area ACE, and a special second hold display guide PD2G for displaying the second hold display is displayed in the second hold display area PD2E.

Next, when the variable display based on the reserved memory that is the target of the V stock begins, the second V stock performance ends, the reduced V stock number display of the special time-saving background image is consumed (erased), and a V stock release performance (not shown) is executed to notify the player that a "hit" corresponding to the V stock has occurred in the variable display. Note that in this embodiment, even after the second V stock performance ends and the V stock release performance is executed, the special time-saving background image other than the reduced V stock number display continues to be displayed on the image display device 5. Note that during small hit play and big hit play of a "hit" corresponding to the V stock, only the rainbow-colored caption display continues to be displayed superimposed on the performance image.

In the second V stock performance, scratched song X [song data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and song data X2] "Weh, Weh, Weh, Weh, Welcome Lucky (omitted)" is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R. However, during the period when the special symbol variable display is not being executed, a mute process is executed that sets the channel setting ratio of song X to 0%, so that the player cannot recognize the playback output of song X. On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol variable display is being executed, the channel setting ratio of song X is set to 100%, so that the player can recognize the playback output of song X.

[Big hit start performance decision process]
Fig. 9-47 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed during a jackpot. The effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot start effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-47 in the jackpot effect process (step S176) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command, it determines the effect to be executed during a jackpot (and the effect not to be executed) by the jackpot start effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-47.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurred during either the Rush Challenge or Powerful Rush performance mode (step S05TM3010). If the jackpot did not occur during either the Rush Challenge or Powerful Rush performance mode (step S05TM3010: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot occurs during either the Rush Challenge or Powerful Rush presentation mode (step S05TM3010: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the jackpot type notification presentation described below (step S05TM3020), and determines whether any of the display results in the reserved memory is a "small jackpot" or a "jackpot" (step S05TM3030).

If any of the display results in the pending memory is a "small win" or a "big win" (step S05TM3030: YES), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM3050.

If none of the display results in the reserved memory are "small hit" or "big hit" (step S05TM3030: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A" (step S05TM3040). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is not "10R jackpot A" (step S05TM3040: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM3080.

If the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A" (step S05TM3040: YES), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM3050.

After step S05TM3030: YES or step S05TM3040: YES, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first V stock performance based on a table for determining whether or not to execute the first V stock performance (see FIG. 9-48 (A)) (step S05TM3050), and judges whether or not it has been decided to execute the first V stock performance (step S05TM3060). If it has been decided not to execute the first V stock performance (step S05TM3060: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S05TM3080.

If it has been decided to execute the first V stock effect (step S05TM3060: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the V stock flag (step S05TM3070), which will be described later, and proceeds to step S05TM3080.

After step S05TM3040: NO, step S05TM3060: NO, or step S05TM3070, the presentation control CPU 120 determines the type of jackpot to be announced in the jackpot type announcement presentation based on a table (see FIG. 9-48(B)) for determining the type of jackpot to be announced in the jackpot type announcement presentation (step S05TM3080), and ends the processing.

In this embodiment, the V stock flag is a type of effect flag that is set based on the decision to execute the first V stock effect. By setting the V stock flag, it is possible to decide to execute the second V stock effect in the effect decision process when waiting for the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, and it is possible to decide to continue executing the second V stock effect in the effect judgment process when the fluctuation starts, which will be described later. This V stock flag is erased when the winning change display corresponding to the V stock (pending consecutive, next consecutive) that was the target when the V stock flag was set ends.

[Tables referenced in the process of determining the performance at the start of a big win]
9-48(A) and (B) are specific examples of tables referenced in any of the processes of the jackpot start performance determination process. FIG. 9-48(A) is an example of a first V stock performance execution decision table referenced when determining whether or not to execute the first V stock performance in step S05TM3050. FIG. 9-48(B) is an example of a jackpot type decision table to be notified in the jackpot type notification performance referenced when determining the jackpot type to be notified in the jackpot type notification performance in step S05TM3080.

<Table for determining whether or not to execute the first V stock effect>
FIG. 9-48(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the first V stock effect. As shown in FIG. 9-48(A), in this embodiment, the item for whether or not to execute the first V stock effect can be determined as "no execution", "execution (jackpot FF period)", or "execution (jackpot RD period)", and a judgment value is assigned to each of these items. "Execution (jackpot FF period)" means that the first V stock effect is determined to be executed in the jackpot FF period, and "execution (jackpot RD period)" means that the first V stock effect is determined to be executed in the jackpot RD period.

As shown in Figure 9-48 (A), there is a 50% chance that "no execution" will be determined, a 25% chance that "execution will be performed (jackpot FF period)" will be determined, and a 25% chance that "execution will be performed (jackpot RD period)" will be determined.

<Table for determining the type of jackpot to be notified in the jackpot type notification performance>
Fig. 9-48(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a jackpot type determination table to be notified in the jackpot type notification performance. As shown in Fig. 9-48(B), in this embodiment, the jackpot type to be notified in the jackpot type notification performance is determined according to whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A", "10R jackpot B", or "3R jackpot B" and whether the V stock flag is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-48(B), if the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot A", when the V stock flag is not set (when the V stock flag is not set), the second jackpot type described below is determined to be "MAX BONUS", when the V stock flag is set (when the V stock flag is set) and the timing of the execution of the first V stock performance is during the jackpot FF period, the third jackpot type described below is determined to be "V STOCK BONUS", and when the V stock flag is set and the timing of the execution of the first V stock performance is during the jackpot RD period, the second jackpot type is determined to be "MAX BONUS".

In addition, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is "10R jackpot B", when the V stock flag is not set, the second jackpot type is determined to be "MAX BONUS", when the V stock flag is set and the timing of the execution of the first V stock performance is during the jackpot FF period, the third jackpot type is determined to be "V STOCK BONUS", and when the V stock flag is set and the timing of the execution of the first V stock performance is during the jackpot RD period, the second jackpot type is determined to be "MAX BONUS".

In addition, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is "3R jackpot B", when the V stock flag is not set, the first jackpot type is determined to be "BONUS", when the V stock flag is set and the execution timing of the first V stock performance is during the jackpot FF period, the third jackpot type is determined to be "V STOCK BONUS", and when the V stock flag is set and the execution timing of the first V stock performance is during the jackpot RD period, the first jackpot type is determined to be "BONUS".

In this way, the third jackpot type "V STOCK BONUS" is only announced when the V Stock flag is set, so the announcement of the third jackpot type "V STOCK BONUS" can be said to be an announcement that the first V Stock presentation will be executed.

[Big hit type notification effect]
In this embodiment, during the jackpot FF period in the jackpot game state, a jackpot type notification effect can be executed to notify the jackpot type of the jackpot. The jackpot types notified in the jackpot type notification effect include a first jackpot type that notifies the player of a "3R jackpot B" (i.e., a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" or a "3(2)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot"), a second jackpot type that notifies the player of a "10R jackpot B" (i.e., a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" (7 times) or a "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot" (7 times)), and a third jackpot type that notifies the player of a "10R jackpot A" (i.e., a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" (99 times) or a "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot" (99 times)).

The first jackpot type is indicated by the word "BONUS", the second jackpot type is indicated by the word "MAX BONUS", and the third jackpot type is indicated by the word "V STOCK BONUS".

The jackpot type notification performance is a series of performances as shown below.
First, as shown in Figure 9-49 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot FF period, the first jackpot type candidate display OSA is displayed at the top center of the screen of the image display device 5, the second jackpot type candidate display OSB is displayed at the bottom left of the screen, and the third jackpot type candidate display OSC is displayed at the bottom right of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (2), an operation prompting display BT that prompts the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, push button 31B) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on the first jackpot type candidate display OSA, the second jackpot type candidate display OSB, and the third jackpot type candidate display OSC.

Next, when the player operates the operation unit, the type of jackpot determined in step S05TM3080 of the jackpot start presentation determination process is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (3A), if the jackpot type determined in step S05TM3080 of the jackpot start presentation determination process is the first jackpot type, the word "BONUS" is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5; as shown in FIG. 9-49 (3B), if the jackpot type determined in step S05TM3080 of the jackpot start presentation determination process is the second jackpot type, the word "MAX BONUS" is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5; and as shown in FIG. 9-49 (3C), if the jackpot type determined in step S05TM3080 of the jackpot start presentation determination process is the third jackpot type, the word "V STOCK BONUS" is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

<Example of big win (without 1st V stock effect)>
9-50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the image and sound of each effect related to the big win in which the first V stock effect is not executed. In this example, a V win occurs in a small win game, and the big win type is a "small win via 10 (9) R time-saving big win".

First, the images in Figures 9-50 (1A) and (1B) are similar to those in Figures 9-49 (3A) and (3B) described above, so we will not explain them here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (2), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a normal jackpot round game image OAI. This jackpot round game image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "2 ROUND"), a number of winning balls display (in this example, the characters "00600pt"), and a normal jackpot background image. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the right hit promotion image to be constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays a special operation prompt display BT2 and a song display (in this example, an object resembling a musical note and the words "Song A") in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs the unscratched performance sound A [song data A] "Powerful Power (omitted below)" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<Jackpot (1st V stock effect during jackpot FF period)>
9-51 to 9-53 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the image and sound of each effect related to the big win in which the first V stock effect is executed during the big win FF period. In this example, a V win occurs in a small win game, and a big win with a big win type of "small win via 10 (9) R time-saving big win" occurs.

First, the image produced in Figure 9-51 (1) is similar to that shown in Figure 9-49 (3C) described above, so we will not explain it here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (2), at the timing when the first V stock effect should be executed during the jackpot FF period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first V stock display VSI1 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The first V stock display is composed of the letter "V", which is the initial letter of "V STOCK", indicating that V stock has been performed, and a character (A) is displayed inside the first V stock display. The first V stock display has an overall display color of white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs performance sound A [first performance sound A] "bu" from speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 also plays and outputs song X [song data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and song data X2] "We, we, we, we, welcome lucky (omitted)" from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this example, the channel setting ratio for sound effect A is set to 100%, while the channel setting ratio for music piece X is set to 20%, thereby decreasing the clarity of music piece X and improving the clarity of sound effect A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-51 (3), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first V stock performance, and causes the second V stock display VSI2, which is an image larger than the first V stock display, to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The second V stock display is composed of the letter "V", which is the initial letter of "V STOCK", indicating that the item is V-stocked, and a character (A) is displayed inside the second V stock display. The display color of the entire second V stock display is black, which is in a complementary color contrast with white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance sound A [first performance sound A] "bu" to be continuously played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 also causes the performance sound X [music data X2] to be continuously played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figures 9-52 (4) and (5) are the same as those in Figures 9-51 (2) and (3) described above, so a description will be omitted. Note that Figure 9-52 (4) is the same as Figure 9-51 (2) except that song X [song data X2] continues to be played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-52 (6), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third V stock display VSI3 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The third V stock display is composed of the characters "V STOCK" indicating that V stock has been performed, and a character (A) is displayed inside the third V stock display. In the third V stock display, the character "V" is displayed in white, and the character "STOCK" is displayed in black.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance sound A [first performance sound A and second performance sound A] "V Stock" to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 also causes the music X [music data X2] to be continuously played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, each time the first V stock display VSI1 and the second V stock display VSI2 are displayed, the first sound effect A is scratched and played back from the speakers 8L and 8R, so sound effect A is played back as "Bu, bu, bu, bu, bu stock."

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompt display in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to play and output the song X [song data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (8), upon a predetermined trigger (operation of push button 31B, passage of a predetermined period of time, etc.), the performance control CPU 120 displays the V stock number display VNI (in this example, "V STOCK x 1") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to play and output song X [song data X2] from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (9), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a special jackpot round game image OBI. This jackpot round game image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "2ROUND"), a prize ball count display (in this example, the characters "00600pt"), a special jackpot background image, a rainbow-colored caption display TI, and a reduced V stock count display VNI.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to play and output the song X [song data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and song data X2] "Weh, weh, weh, weh, welcome lucky (omitted)" from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the clarity of the song X is improved by setting the channel setting ratio of the song X played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R to 100% when the big win round play starts.

<Jackpot (there is a first V stock effect during the jackpot RD period)>
9-54 to 9-57 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the image and sound of each effect related to the big win in which the first V stock effect is executed during the big win RD period. In this example, a V win occurs in a small win game, and a big win with a big win type of "small win via 10 (9) R time-saving big win" occurs.

First, the images and sounds produced in Figures 9-54 (1A), (1B), and (2) are the same as those in Figures 9-50 (1A), (1B), and (2) described above, so a description will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (3), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the first V stock presentation, erases the normal jackpot round game image OAI on the image display device 5, and displays the first V stock display VSI1 in the center of the screen. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the round display (in this example, the characters "3ROUND") and the number of winning balls display (in this example, the characters "00750pt").

The performance control CPU 120 also causes the speakers 8L and 8R to play and output performance sound A [first performance sound A] "bu." The performance control CPU 120 also causes the speakers 8L and 8R to end the playback and output of song A [song data A], and starts the playback and output of song X [song data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and song data X2] "Weh, weh, weh, weh, welcome lucky (omitted)."

In this example, the channel setting ratio for sound effect A is set to 100%, while the channel setting ratio for music piece X is set to 20%, thereby decreasing the clarity of music piece X and improving the clarity of sound effect A.

In addition, although music X is being played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R, the performance control CPU 120 does not display any information related to the music in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-54 (4), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first V stock performance and displays the second V stock display VSI2, which is an image larger than the first V stock display, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the round display (in this example, the characters "3ROUND") and the number of winning balls display (in this example, the characters "00750pt").

The performance control CPU 120 also causes the performance sound A [first performance sound A] "bu" to be continuously played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 also causes the performance sound X [music data X2] to be continuously played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figures 9-55(5) and (6) are the same as those in Figures 9-54(3) and 9-55(4) described above, so a description will be omitted. Note that in Figures 9-54(3) and 9-55(4), the round display and the number of winning balls display are updated as shown in the figures. Also, in Figure 9-55(5), music X [music data X2] continues to be played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the rest is the same as Figure 9-54(3).

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figures 9-56 (7) to 9-57 (10) are the same as those in Figures 9-52 (6) to 9-53 (9) described above, so a description will be omitted. Note that in Figures 9-56 (7) to 9-57 (10), the round display and the number of winning balls display are assumed to be updated as shown in the figures.

As shown in FIG. 9-57 (10), the performance control CPU 120 continuously plays and outputs the music X [music data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and music data X2] "Weh, Weh, Weh, Weh, Welcome Lucky (omitted)" from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the timing when the big win round game starts, the channel setting ratio of the music X played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%, thereby improving the clarity of the music X. Accordingly, the performance control CPU 120 displays a music display (in this example, an object imitating a musical note and the letters "Music X") in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. However, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the special operation prompt display BT2 in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this way, when the first V stock effect is executed during the jackpot RD period, the various effects related to the jackpot round play that were being executed before the first V stock effect was executed (display of a normal jackpot round play image, playback output of music A) are interrupted, and after the first V stock effect is executed, various effects (display of a special jackpot round play image, playback output of music X) with a different presentation style from the various effects related to the jackpot round play that were previously executed (display of a normal jackpot round play image, playback output of music A) are resumed.

[Performance decision process at the end of the big win]
Fig. 9-58 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed during a jackpot. The effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot end effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-58 in the jackpot end effect process (step S176) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command, it determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) at the end of the jackpot by the jackpot end effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-58.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the presentation mode after the end of the jackpot is rush mode (step S05TM4010). If the presentation mode after the end of the jackpot is not rush mode (step S05TM4010: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the presentation mode after the end of the jackpot is rush mode (step S05TM4010: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the time-saving presentation described below (step S05TM4020), and ends the process.

[Rush mode production mode]
In this embodiment, the presentation modes when controlled in the rush mode are "Yume Yume mode", "Nana mode", and "Jam mode". "Yume Yume mode" is a presentation mode in which character A mainly appears, "Nana mode" is a presentation mode in which character B mainly appears, and "Jam mode" is a presentation mode in which character C mainly appears.

In this embodiment, the player can select which presentation mode to play in the rush mode. Specifically, in the final round of the jackpot round game (the third round in the case of a 3R jackpot, the tenth round in the case of a 10R jackpot), a jackpot final round game image is displayed on the image display device 5. This jackpot final round game image has a first selection section (Dream Dream Mode) on the left side of the screen, a second selection section (Nana Mode) in the center of the screen, and a third selection section (Jam Mode) on the right side of the screen. By operating the operation section, the player can select one of the presentation modes shown in the first to third selection sections of this jackpot final round game image.

In this embodiment, in the jackpot final round game image displayed on the image display device 5, the selected selection parts are displayed in normal color (each character's normal character color (Character A: green hair, flesh-colored skin, red cape, etc.)), and this state is referred to as the "selected state," and the presentation mode in which the unselected selection parts are displayed entirely in gray, and this state is referred to as the "non-selected state."

In this embodiment, when the final round of the jackpot round game is started and the display of the jackpot final round game image starts on the image display device 5, the first selection section (Dream Dream Mode) of the jackpot final round game image is displayed in a selected state, and the second selection section (Nana Mode) and the third selection section (Jam Mode) are displayed in a non-selected state. Then, when the final round of the jackpot round game is ended and the display of the jackpot final round game image ends on the image display device 5, the presentation mode that corresponds to the selection section that is in a selected state of the jackpot final round game image is determined as the presentation mode to be executed in rush mode.

<Example of Rush Mode Effects>
Figure 9-59 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image of each presentation related to the case where a presentation mode in rush mode is selected in the final round of the jackpot round period and control is exercised in the rush mode of the selected presentation mode.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-59(1), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (final round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot final round game image OLI on the image display device 5. This jackpot final round game image is an image including a round display (in this example, the characters "FINAL ROUND"), a prize ball count display (in this example, the characters "00300pt"), and a first selection section to a third selection section. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first selection section in a selected state, and displays the second selection section and the third selection section in a non-selected state. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays a special operation prompt display BT2 and a song display (in this example, an object resembling a musical note and the characters "Song A") in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this state, when the CPU 103 ends the round play (final round) in the jackpot play state, the pattern proceeds to the pattern determined in the first selection section (Dream Dream Mode) shown in FIG. 9-59 (2A), the pattern determined in the second selection section (Nana Mode) shown in FIG. 9-59 (2B), or the pattern determined in the third selection section (Jam Mode) shown in FIG. 9-59 (2C).

(Pattern determined in the first selection section (Dream mode))
As shown in Fig. 9-59 (2A), when the CPU 103 ends the round game (final round) in the jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the first selection section in a selected state and displays the second selection section and the third selection section in a non-selected state based on the operation of the operation section by the player. At this time, the round display (in this example, the characters "Final ROUND") and the number of winning balls display (in this example, the characters "00450pt") are updated.

In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the Dream Dream mode corresponding to the first selection section as the rush mode performance mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (3A), when the time-saving state is entered and the presentation mode is controlled to Rush mode: Dream Dream mode, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a first normal time-saving background image as a background image. This first normal time-saving background image is an image including the words "POWERFUL RUSH", a display of the number of remaining time-saving times (in this example, the words "6 times remaining"), the "Dream Dream mode" emblem EMI1, and the character (A) CA.

At this time, based on the fact that the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Also, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

(Pattern determined in the second selection section (Nana mode))
As shown in Fig. 9-59 (2B), when the CPU 103 ends the round game (final round) in the jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the second selection section in a selected state and displays the first selection section and the third selection section in a non-selected state based on the operation of the operation section by the player. At this time, the round display (in this example, the characters "FINAL ROUND") and the number of winning balls display (in this example, the characters "00450pt") are updated.

In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the Nana mode corresponding to the second selection section as the rush mode performance mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (3B), when the time-saving state is entered and the presentation mode is controlled to Rush Mode: Nana Mode, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a second normal time-saving background image as a background image. This second normal time-saving background image is an image including the words "POWERFUL RUSH", a display of the number of remaining time-saving times (in this example, the words "6 times remaining"), the "Nana Mode" emblem EMI2, and the character (B) CB.

At this time, based on the CPU 103 executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Also, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

(Pattern determined in the third selection section (jam mode))
As shown in Fig. 9-59 (2C), when the CPU 103 ends the round game (final round) in the jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the third selection section in a selected state and displays the first selection section and the second selection section in a non-selected state based on the operation of the operation section by the player. At this time, the round display (in this example, the characters "FINAL ROUND") and the number of winning balls display (in this example, the characters "00450pt") are updated.

In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the jam mode corresponding to the third selection section as the rush mode performance mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-59 (3C), when the time-saving state is entered and the presentation mode is controlled to rush mode: jam mode, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a third normal time-saving background image as a background image. This third normal time-saving background image is an image including the words "POWERFUL RUSH", a display of the number of remaining time-saving times (in this example, the words "6 times remaining"), the "jam mode" emblem EMI3, and the characters (C)CC.

At this time, based on the CPU 103 executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Also, the active display AC in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area ACE.

[Processing for determining effects when waiting for fluctuation start]
Fig. 9-60 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed when waiting for the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-60 during the variable display start waiting process (step S170) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command, it determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display start waiting period by the effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-60.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the performance mode is rush mode (step S05TM5010). If the performance mode is not rush mode (step S05TM5010: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the presentation mode is rush mode (step S05TM5010: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the V stock flag is set (step S05TM5020). If the V stock flag is not set (step S05TM5020: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the V stock flag is set (step S05TM5020: YES), the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the second V stock performance (step S05TM5020) and ends the processing.

In this way, as shown in step S05TM5020: YES → step S05TM5030 of the processing for determining the effect when waiting for the start of fluctuation, if the V stock flag is set, it is decided to execute the second V stock effect.

[Processing for determining whether or not to execute second V stock effect at the start of fluctuation]
FIG. 9-61 is a flowchart showing the effect judgment process executed at the start of the fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the second V stock effect execution determination process shown in FIG. 9-61 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special pattern, it sets an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern based on the display result designation command and the variable pattern designation command, and determines whether or not the second V stock effect is executed by the second V stock effect execution determination process shown in FIG. 9-61.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the performance mode is rush mode (step S05TM6010). If the performance mode is not rush mode (step S05TM6010: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the presentation mode is rush mode (step S05TM6010: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the V stock flag is set (step S05TM6020). If the V stock flag is not set (step S05TM6020: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the V stock flag is set (step S05TM6020: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the change display is a winning change display that is the target of the V stock flag (step S05TM6030).

If the change display is not a winning change display that is the target of the V stock flag (step S05TM6030: NO), the performance control CPU 120 decides to continue executing the second V stock performance (step S05TM6040) and ends the processing.

If the change display is a winning change display that is subject to the V stock flag (step S05TM6030: YES), the performance control CPU 120 decides to end the second V stock performance (step S05TM6050), and ends the processing.

In this way, as shown in step S05TM6020: YES → step S05TM6030: NO → step S05TM6040 of the process for determining whether or not to execute the second V stock performance at the start of the fluctuation, if the V stock flag is set and the fluctuation display is not a winning fluctuation display that is the target of the V stock flag, it is decided to continue executing the second V stock performance. Also, as shown in step S05TM6020: YES → step S05TM6030: YES → step S05TM6050 of the process for determining whether or not to execute the second V stock performance at the start of the fluctuation, if the V stock flag is set and the fluctuation display is a winning fluctuation display that is the target of the V stock flag, it is decided to end the second V stock performance.

[Time-saving (rush mode) performance depending on V stock availability]
In this embodiment, when the game is controlled in the time-saving state (rush mode), the presentation mode related to the presentation image and the presentation sound during the rush mode differs depending on whether the V stock flag is set or not. That is, the presentation mode of the rush mode differs depending on whether the second V stock presentation is being executed or not.

In this embodiment, the player can select the music to be played during rush mode. Specifically, if the V stock effect is not being executed during rush mode, the player can arbitrarily select the music to be played during rush mode from among songs A to C. Also, if the V stock effect is being executed during rush mode, the player cannot arbitrarily select the music to be played during rush mode from among songs A to C, and the music to be played during rush mode is fixed to song X.

<Example of time-saving (without second V stock effect)>
9-62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image and the effect sound of each effect related when the second V stock effect is not executed when the game state is the time-saving state and the effect mode is the rush mode. In this example, when the effect mode is controlled to the dream dream mode, the second V stock effect is not executed based on the fact that the V stock flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 9-62, when the time-saving state is entered and the presentation mode is controlled to Rush mode: Dream Dream mode, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a first normal time-saving background image as a background image. This first normal time-saving background image is an image including the words "POWERFUL RUSH", a display of the number of remaining time-saving times (in this example, the words "6 remaining"), the "Dream Dream mode" emblem EMI1, and the character (A) CA.

At this time, based on the CPU 103 executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and executes the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display AC in the normal mode in the active display area ACE, and displays four second hold displays PD2 in the normal mode in the second hold display area PD2E.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays a special operation prompt display BT2 and a song display (in this example, an object resembling a musical note and the words "Song A") in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs song A [song data A] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of time-saving effect (with second V stock effect)>
9-63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images and sound effects of each effect related to the execution of the second V stock effect when the game state is the time-saving state and the effect mode is the rush mode. In this example, an example is shown in which the second V stock effect is executed based on the V stock flag being set when the effect mode is controlled to the dream dream mode.

As shown in FIG. 9-63, when the time-saving state is entered and the presentation mode is controlled to Rush mode: Dream Dream mode, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a first special time-saving background image as a background image. This first special time-saving background image is an image including the words "POWERFUL RUSH", a "Dream Dream mode" emblem EMI1, a character (A) CA, a rainbow-colored caption display TI, and a reduced V stock count display VNI.

At this time, based on CPU 103 executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and executes the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display AC in the special active display guide ACG in the active display area ACE, and displays four normal mode second hold displays PD2 in the special second hold display guide PD2G in the second hold display area PD2E.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays a song display (in this example, an object resembling a musical note and the letters "Song X") in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs song X [song data X1 (scratch: 4 times) and song data X2] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the time-saving state where the second V stock effect is not being executed, the player can arbitrarily select the song during rush mode from among multiple types of songs (in this example, songs A to C), so the special operation prompt display BT2 is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the time-saving state where the second V stock effect is being executed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the song during rush mode from among multiple types of songs (in this example, songs A to C), so the special operation prompt display BT2 is not displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

The fixed effect image (hereinafter referred to as "interface") displayed on the image display device 5 has a more luxurious display mode in the time-saving state in which the second V stock effect is being executed than in the time-saving state in which the second V stock effect is not being executed. In this embodiment, the interface refers to the areas for displaying the corresponding displays (active display area, second pending display area) and the background image.

Specifically, in the time-saving state where the second V stock performance is not being executed, a simple active display guide is displayed in the active display area, and no guide is displayed in the second hold display area, whereas in the time-saving state where the second V stock performance is being executed, a gorgeous special active display guide ACG is displayed in the active display area, and a gorgeous special second hold display guide PD2G is displayed in the second hold display area. Also, in the time-saving state where the second V stock performance is not being executed, the background image does not include a rainbow-colored caption display TI, whereas in the time-saving state where the second V stock performance is being executed, the background image includes a rainbow-colored caption display TI.

In addition, in this embodiment, the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed in a time-saving state where the second V stock performance is not being executed, while the remaining number of time-saving times is not displayed in a time-saving state where the second V stock performance is being executed. This is because in a time-saving state where the second V stock performance is not being executed and the next "hit" is not confirmed, the player must generate a "hit" before the rush mode ends, so the remaining number of time-saving times display, which allows the player to recognize the remaining number of time-saving times, is necessary information for the player, and so the remaining number of time-saving times display is displayed. On the other hand, in a time-saving state where the second V stock performance is being executed and the next "hit" is confirmed, the player recognizes that a "hit" will occur before the rush mode ends, so the remaining number of time-saving times display, which allows the player to recognize the remaining number of time-saving times, is unnecessary information for the player, and so the remaining number of time-saving times display is not displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving state in which the second V stock performance is being executed, the remaining number of times to be saved may be displayed. In this case, the remaining number of times to be saved is displayed as "∞ times remaining." In the time-saving state in which the second V stock performance is being executed, in which the next "hit" is confirmed, by suggesting that the remaining number of times to be saved is infinite (remaining number of times to be saved displayed as "∞ times remaining"), it is possible to suggest that the time-saving state will continue until the next "hit" occurs, and the player can be reassured. However, in reality, the time-saving control is not performed an infinite number of times, and by displaying the remaining number of times to be saved as "∞ times remaining," it is suggested that there is a reserved streak or a next streak.

[Round display after V-Stock effect]
In this embodiment, when a "hit" occurs that is the target of the V stock performance after the V stock performance is executed, the round display in the "hit" is displayed by inheriting the round display in the previous big hit. Specifically, if the big hit type of the previous "hit" in which the V stock performance was executed was a "10R big hit" (i.e., if the round display of the big hit round game is displayed from "1 ROUND" to "10 ROUND"), in the small hit game or big hit round game corresponding to the "hit" that is the target of the V stock performance that occurs thereafter, the round display is displayed from "11 ROUND".

<Jackpot round after V-Stock>
FIG. 9-64 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the round display corresponding to the "win" that occurred after the V stock effect. In this example, the jackpot type of the "jackpot" in which the V stock effect was executed is "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small win", and the jackpot type of the "win" that is the target of the V stock effect is "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small win".

First, as shown in FIG. 9-64(1), when the CPU 103 is executing a round game (final round) in a jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays a jackpot final round game image OLI on the image display device 5. This jackpot final round game image is an image including a round display (in this example, the characters "FINAL ROUND"), a prize ball count display (in this example, the characters "01950pt"), and a first selection section to a third selection section. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first selection section in a selected state, and displays the second selection section and the third selection section in a non-selected state. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a music display (in this example, an object resembling a musical note and the characters "Music X") in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

The presentation control CPU 120 also executes the first V stock presentation, and displays a rainbow-colored caption display TI and a V stock number display VNI superimposed on the big win final round game image OLI on the image display device 5.

Next, the image shown in Figure 9-64 (2) is similar to that shown in Figure 9-63, so we will not explain it here.

Then, after the second special symbol is displayed at least once, a winning display that is the target of the V stock is displayed. During this display, the V stock release effect is executed, and the V stock number display VNI at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-64 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the final decorative symbol combination (in this example, "333") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At the same time, the final small symbol combination (in this example, "333") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols that results in a "small win" display result is determined and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-64 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a small win game image KI. This small win game image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "11 Round"), a big win right hit promotion image that includes the characters "Aim for the V Attacker!!" to enter the V winning hole and an arrow image instructing a right hit, and an image that includes an ally character (A).

Next, when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the performance control CPU 120 displays a V winning occurrence display VI in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-64 (5), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a special jackpot round game image OBI. This jackpot round game image is an image including a round display (in this example, the characters "12ROUND"), a prize ball count display (in this example, the characters "02100pt"), a special jackpot background image, and a rainbow-colored caption display TI. At this time, because the V stock count is 0, the reduced V stock count display VNI is not displayed in the jackpot round game image. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes a music display (in this example, an object resembling a musical note and the characters "Music X") to be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

[Time-saving entry effect]
In this embodiment, when the presentation mode controlled after the big win is the rush mode, during the big win ED period of the big win, a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that the big win will be controlled to the rush mode can be executed. The time-saving entry presentation is a series of presentations shown below.

First, when the time-saving entry effect is executed, a rush mode explanation image JRI is displayed on the image display device 5. The rush mode explanation image is an image including information explaining how to play in rush mode, a demo icon indicating to the player that the game is not currently controlled to the time-saving state and that there is no need to operate the ball-hitting control handle 30, and character A. At this time, sound effect F is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the third countdown image CDI3 is displayed on the image display device 5. When the display of the third countdown image starts, the third countdown image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen. The third countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" in the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen, with the number "3" colored (hereinafter referred to as "colored aspect") and the numbers "2" and "1" not colored (hereinafter referred to as "colorless aspect"). By displaying the numbers in color, the player can recognize that the countdown to that number is progressing. In this case, the player can recognize that the countdown has progressed to "3" out of the "321" countdown. At this time, the effect sound F [first effect sound F3] "three" is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the second countdown image CDI2 is displayed on the image display device 5. The second countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" in the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen, with the numbers "3" and "2" displayed in color and the number "1" displayed in colorless mode. In this case, the player can recognize that the countdown has progressed to "2" out of the "321" countdown. At this time, the sound effect F [first sound effect F2] "Two" is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the first countdown image CDI1 is displayed on the image display device 5. The first countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" in the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen, with the numbers "3", "2", and "1" displayed in color. In this case, the player can recognize that the countdown has progressed to "1" out of the "321" countdown. At this time, the sound effect F [first sound effect F1] "One" is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, a start image JSI is displayed on the image display device 5. The start image is an image including the word "START" and an object of an arrow pointing to the right. When the display of the start image begins, the start image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen. At this time, the performance sound F [second performance sound F (scratch: 4 times)] and [second performance sound F and third performance sound F] "s, s, s, s, s, start" are played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of time-saving effect>
9-65 to 9-67 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the effect images and the effect sounds of each effect related to the time-saving entry effect. In this example, an example is shown in which the time-saving entry effect is executed during the big win ED period in the big win game state, and then the game is controlled to the time-saving state.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-65(1), at the timing when the time-saving entry effect should be executed during the jackpot ED period in the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving entry effect and causes the image display device 5 to display the rush mode explanation image JRI. The rush mode explanation image is an image including information explaining how to play in the rush mode (in this example, "Keep hitting to the right until there are 0 powerful RUSHes remaining!"), a demo icon (in this example, an icon with the letters "DEMO" displayed) that indicates to the player that the time-saving state is not currently being controlled and that there is no need to operate the ball-hitting control handle 30, and character A. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to play and output the effect sound F [sound effect] (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-65(2), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the time-saving entry performance and causes the image display device 5 to display the third countdown image CDI3. When the display of the third countdown image starts, the third countdown image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen. The third countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" in the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen, with the number "3" displayed in color and the numbers "2" and "1" displayed in colorless form. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance sound F [first performance sound F3] "three" to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-65 (3), the performance control CPU 120 continues executing the time-saving entry performance and causes the image display device 5 to display the second countdown image CDI2. The second countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" in the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen, with the numbers "3" and "2" displayed in color and the number "1" displayed in colorless mode. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to play and output the performance sound F [first performance sound F2] "Two."

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-66 (4), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the time-saving entry performance and causes the image display device 5 to display the first countdown image CDI1. The first countdown image is an image including the number "3" on the left side of the screen, the number "2" in the center of the screen, and the number "1" on the right side of the screen, with the numbers "3", "2", and "1" displayed in color. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to play and output the performance sound F [first performance sound F1] "One".

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-66 (5), a start image JSI is displayed on the image display device 5. The start image is an image including the letters "START" and an object of an arrow pointing to the right. When the display of the start image begins, the start image is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 outputs performance sound F [second performance sound F (scratch: 4 times)] and [second performance sound F and third performance sound F] "s, s, s, s, s, start" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, when the start image in the time-saving entry effect is displayed, the second effect sound F is scratched and played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, so that the second effect sound F and the third effect sound F are played and output as "s, s, s, s, s, start."

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-66 (6), when the time-saving state is entered and the presentation mode is controlled to Rush Mode: Dream Dream Mode, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the first normal time-saving background image as the background image. This first normal time-saving background image is an image including the words "POWERFUL RUSH", an indication of the number of remaining time-saving times (in this example, the words "7 times remaining"), and the "Dream Dream Mode" emblem EMI1. At this time, the character (A) CA is not displayed in the first normal time-saving background image.

At this time, based on the fact that CPU 103 has not executed the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 has confirmed and stopped the final decorative symbol combination (in this example, "333") of the variable display in which the previous jackpot occurred in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and has confirmed and stopped the small symbol combination (in this example, "333") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 has four second hold displays PD2 in the normal mode displayed in the second hold display area PD2E.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays a special operation prompt display BT2 and a song display (in this example, an object resembling a musical note and the words "Song A") in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. However, at this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not cause the playback output of Song A [Song Data A] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-67 (7), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In addition, based on the fact that the second pending memory count has reached 3, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area ACE to newly display an active display AC in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and shifts the second pending display PD2 in the normal mode that was displayed in the second pending display area PD2E one by one toward the active display area ACE.

The performance control CPU 120 also continues to display a special operation prompt display BT2 and a song display (in this example, an object resembling a musical note and the words "Song A") in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs song A [song data A] from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 also makes the character (A) CA appear by moving it from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. In this example, only the upper body of the character (A) CA is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-67 (8), the performance control CPU 120 makes the character (A) CA appear by moving it from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen, and in this example, the entire body of the character (A) CA is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

[Special Annihilation Performance]
In this embodiment, in the annihilation SP performance of the "SP-X miss" and "SP-X jackpot" variation patterns among the variation patterns involving a super reach, an annihilation gauge is displayed as an indicator of whether the enemy character group Y can be annihilated. Here, in the case of the "SP-X jackpot" variation pattern, the annihilation gauge can be made to reach its maximum value (annihilation icon) within the time limit (operation valid period) by operating (repeatedly tapping) the operation unit, the annihilation performance is executed, and the final display result is notified that it is a "jackpot". On the other hand, in the case of the "SP-X miss" variation pattern, the annihilation gauge cannot be made to reach its maximum value (annihilation icon) within the time limit (operation valid period) by operating (repeatedly tapping) the operation unit, the remaining performance is executed, and the display result is notified that it is a "miss".

<Example of the annihilation SP performance>
9-68 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the annihilation SP performance. In this example, when the annihilation SP performance is being performed, a pattern example in which the remaining performance is performed and a pattern example in which the annihilation performance is performed are shown.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-68 (1), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into a super reach, the performance control CPU 120 executes an annihilation SP performance and causes the image display device 5 to display an annihilation SP start image. The annihilation SP start image is an image in which the initial state of the annihilation gauge and the words "Annihilate the enemies by repeatedly pressing the button!" are superimposed on the enemy character group Y CYG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-68 (2), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the annihilation SP presentation and causes the image display device 5 to display an annihilation SP rapid-fire image. The annihilation SP rapid-fire image is an image in which the initial state of the annihilation gauge GI and an operation prompting display BT, which prompts the player to operate (repeatedly press) the operation unit (in this example, the push button 31B), are superimposed on the enemy character group Y CYG.

In this example, the operation prompting display BT is formed by adding the words "Repeat taps!!" to the right of an object that resembles push button 31B and a downward arrow above it, and adding a time bar indicating the validity period of the operation below the object that resembles push button 31B. Here, because the enemy characters Y group CYG and annihilation gauge GI are displayed in the background of the operation prompting display BT, the player operates the operation part in the hope of annihilat- ing the enemy characters Y group by operating the operation part (repeat taps of push button 31B).

Even if the player does not operate the operation unit, effects based on the change pattern (remaining effects, annihilation effects) will be executed after a specified period of time has passed, etc.

In this state, when the valid operation period ends, the pattern will proceed to one in which the remaining effect shown in FIG. 9-68 (3A) is executed, or one in which the annihilation effect shown in FIG. 9-68 (3B) is executed.

(Pattern in which remaining effects are executed)
As shown in Fig. 9-68 (3A), at the timing when the remaining effect in the variation pattern of "SP-X Miss" should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the remaining effect and displays the remaining notification image ZI on the image display device 5. The remaining notification image is an image in which the annihilation gauge GI in a state where the annihilation icon has not been reached and the word "remaining" are superimposed on the enemy character Y group CYG.

(Pattern in which the annihilation effect is performed)
As shown in Fig. 9-68 (3B), at the timing when the annihilation effect in the variation pattern of "SP-X big win" should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the annihilation effect and displays an annihilation notification image DSI on the image display device 5. The annihilation notification image is an image in which an annihilation gauge GI that has reached the annihilation icon and the word "annihilation" are superimposed on a flame image showing that the enemy character group Y has been annihilated and is on fire.

[Extermination SP sound effects]
In this embodiment, when the operation of the operation unit by the player is accepted during the operation effective period of the annihilation SP effect, the effect sound H "Take that!" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L, 8R. That is, when the operation unit is operated once, the effect sound H "Take that!" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L, 8R once. Also, the reproduction output period of the effect sound H is 3S.

In this embodiment, when a player operates the operation unit (first operation) during the effective operation period of the annihilation SP effect, and the next operation of the operation unit (second operation) is accepted before the end of the playback output period (3S) of the effect sound H when the effect sound H "Take that!" is being played and output from speakers 8L, 8R, the playback output of the effect sound H that was previously played and output is cancelled, and a new playback output of the effect sound H based on the second operation is started. This also applies to the third operation after the second operation, the fourth operation after the third operation, (omitted below), etc.

Each time the player operates the control unit, a new sound effect H is played back and output, allowing the player to perform a pseudo scratch process at any time and play back sound effect H from speakers 8L and 8R. This configuration can increase the excitement of the annihilation SP performance, which involves the gameplay of repeatedly tapping the control unit.

<Example of sound effects during the annihilation SP>
Figures 9-69 (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the sound effects of each effect related to the annihilation SP effect.

As shown in FIG. 9-69(1), when the annihilation SP presentation is executed and the operation prompt display is displayed during a specific timing (timing: T2) during the effective operation period (period T1 to TL), when the operation section is operated by the player, the presentation control CPU 120 plays and outputs presentation sound H "Take that!" from speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, the playback output period of presentation sound H is 3S.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-69 (2), when the annihilation SP presentation is being executed and the operation prompt display is displayed during a specific timing (timing: T2) during the effective operation period (period T1 to TL), when the player operates the operation unit (first operation), the presentation control CPU 120 plays and outputs presentation sound H from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, when the next operation of the operation unit (second operation) is received while the effect sound H based on the first operation is being played back (for example, at the timing T3 0.5 seconds after the playback output of the effect sound H based on the first operation was started), the effect control CPU 120 ends the playback output of the effect sound H based on the first operation from the speakers 8L, 8R and starts the playback output of the effect sound H based on the second operation. At this time, only the "ku" part of "take this" is being played back as the effect sound H based on the first operation.

Next, when the next operation of the operation section (third operation) is received while the sound effect H based on the second operation is being played back (for example, at the timing T4, 0.5 seconds after the playback output of the sound effect H based on the second operation was started), the performance control CPU 120 ends the playback output of the sound effect H based on the second operation from the speakers 8L, 8R, and starts the playback output of the sound effect H based on the third operation. At this time, only the "ku" part of "take this" is being played back as the sound effect H based on the second operation.

Next, when the next operation of the operation section (fourth operation) is received while the sound effect H based on the third operation is being played back (for example, at the timing T5, 0.5 seconds after the playback output of the sound effect H based on the third operation was started), the performance control CPU 120 ends the playback output of the sound effect H based on the third operation from the speakers 8L, 8R and starts the playback output of the sound effect H based on the fourth operation. At this time, only the "ku" from "take this" is being played back as the sound effect H based on the third operation.

Next, when the next operation of the operation unit (fifth operation) is received while the sound effect H based on the fourth operation is being played back (for example, at the timing T6 0.5 seconds after the sound effect H based on the fourth operation was started), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance ends the playback of the sound effect H based on the fourth operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and starts the playback of the sound effect H based on the fifth operation. At this time, only the "ku" part of "take this" is being played back as the sound effect H based on the fourth operation. Then, the sound effect H based on the fifth operation is "take this" for three seconds.

In this way, each time the player operates the control unit, the effect sound H is scratched and played back from speakers 8L and 8R, so the effect sound H is played back as "Ku, ku, ku, ku, take this!".

[Right hit jackpot notification effect]
In this embodiment, when the variable display is controlled to the rush mode, if the variable pattern is a "normal reach jackpot", a right-hit jackpot notification effect can be executed to notify the user that the display result is a "jackpot". The right-hit jackpot notification effects include a first right-hit jackpot notification effect, a second right-hit jackpot notification effect, and a third right-hit jackpot notification effect. In this embodiment, when the presentation mode is controlled to the rush mode, it is appropriately referred to as a "right hit".

[First right hit jackpot notification]
The first right-hit jackpot notification effect is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed to notify the display result when the presentation mode is Rush mode: Dream Dream mode, the display result (jackpot type) is either "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". ... display mode is Rush mode: Dream Dream mode, the display result (jackpot type) is either "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". The first right-hit jackpot notification effect is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when the display result is "hit" and a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, the passage of a predetermined period of time, etc.).

When a jackpot is announced on the first right hit, the unscratched sound effect D1 [first sound effect D1 and second sound effect D1] "Victory" (character A voice) is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of the big win notification effect when hitting the first right button>
FIG. 9-70 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation images and presentation sounds of each presentation related to the jackpot notification presentation upon the first right hit.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-70 (1), when the "3" decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 to create a reach state, at the timing when the operation prompting display in the variable pattern should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display BT in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, push button 31B). The other performance images are the same as those in FIG. 9-59 (3A), so their explanation will be omitted.

In this example, the operation prompting display BT is formed by adding the words "PRESS!!" and a downward arrow above an object that resembles a push button 31B, and adding a time bar indicating the validity period of the operation below the object that resembles a push button 31B.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs performance sound I1 "Push" (character A's voice) from speakers 8L and 8R. Rush mode under control: Dream Dream mode is a performance in which character A mainly appears, so the performance sound when the operation prompt display is displayed is a performance sound related to character A (character A's character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-70(2), when the player operates the operation unit, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes the presentation for informing the player of a big win on the first right hit, and stops and displays the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") that results in a "win" display in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation plays and outputs the presentation sound D1 [first presentation sound D1 and second presentation sound D1] "Victory" (character A's voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the Rush Mode: Dream Dream Mode during control, character A mainly appears in the presentation, so the presentation sound when the display result is announced as a "win" is related to character A (character A's character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-70 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the decorative symbol combination (in this example, "333") that results in a "win" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 erases the active display AC in the active display area ACE, corresponding to the fact that a variable display is not currently being executed. The performance control CPU 120 also ends the playback output of any performance sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 9-70, when the big win notification effect is executed on the first right hit, the effect sound D1 "Victory" is played and output, which does not cause any of the effect sounds to scratch.

[Special jackpot announcement when hitting right for the first time]
The special jackpot notification effect at the first right hit is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result when the presentation mode is Rush mode: Dream Dream mode, the display result (jackpot type) is "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". The special jackpot notification effect at the first right hit is a combination of decorative symbols that indicate the display result will be "hit" and is displayed stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, the passage of a predetermined period of time, etc.).

When hitting the right button for the first time, the special big win notification effect will play sound effect D1 [first sound effect D1 (scratch: 2 times) and second sound effect D1] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character A voice) from speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of special big win notification effect when hitting the first right button>
Figure 9-71 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation images and presentation sounds of each presentation related to the special jackpot announcement presentation on the first right hit.

First, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-71 (1) are the same as those in Figure 9-70 (1) described above, so we will not explain them here.

Then, the effect image in FIG. 9-71(2) is the same as that in FIG. 9-70(2) described above, so the explanation will be omitted. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 plays and outputs the effect sound D1 [first effect sound D1 (scratch: 2 times) and second effect sound D1] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character A's voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Since the Rush Mode: Dream Dream Mode being controlled is an effect in which character A mainly appears, the effect sound when it is announced that the display result is a "hit" is the effect sound related to character A (character A's character voice).

Next, the images and sounds produced in FIG. 9-71 (3) are the same as those in FIG. 9-70 (3) described above, so a description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-71, when the special jackpot notification effect is executed on the first right hit, the first sound effect D1 is scratched twice and played back from speakers 8L and 8R, so sound effect D1 is played back as "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character A voice).

[Second right hit jackpot notification effect]
The second right-hit jackpot notification effect is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result when the presentation mode is rush mode: Nana mode, the display result (jackpot type) is either "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". The second right-hit jackpot notification effect is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result when the presentation mode is rush mode: Nana mode, the display result (jackpot type) is either "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". The second right-hit jackpot notification effect is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result when the display ...

When the second right hit is made, the jackpot notification effect is the non-scratched effect sound D2 [first effect sound D2 and second effect sound D2] "Victory" (character B voice) that is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of the big win notification effect when hitting the second right button>
Figure 9-72 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation images and presentation sounds of each presentation related to the jackpot notification presentation when the second right hit is made.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-72 (1), when a "3" decorative symbol is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 to create a reach state, at the timing when an operation prompting display in a variable pattern should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display BT in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, push button 31B). The other performance images are the same as those in FIG. 9-59 (3B), so their explanation will be omitted.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs performance sound I2 "Push" (character B voice) from speakers 8L and 8R. Since the Rush Mode: Nana Mode being controlled is a performance in which character B mainly appears, the performance sound when the operation prompt display is displayed is a performance sound related to character B (character B's character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-72(2), when the player operates the operation unit, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes the presentation for informing the player of a big win on the second right hit, and stops and displays the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") that results in a "win" display result in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation plays and outputs the presentation sound D2 [first presentation sound D2 and second presentation sound D2] "Victory" (character B voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. The rush mode: Nana mode being controlled is a presentation in which character B mainly appears, so the presentation sound when the display result is announced as a "win" is a presentation sound related to character B (character B's character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-72 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") that results in a "win" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 erases the active display AC in the active display area ACE, corresponding to the fact that a variable display is not currently being executed. The performance control CPU 120 also ends the playback output of any performance sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 9-72, when the big win notification effect is executed on the second right hit, sound effect D2 "Victory" (character B voice) which does not cause any sound effects to scratch is played and output.

[Special big win notification effect when hitting the second right button]
The special jackpot notification effect when the second right hit is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result when the presentation mode is rush mode: Nana mode, the display result (jackpot type) is "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". The special jackpot notification effect when the second right hit is performed when a combination of decorative patterns indicating that the display result is "hit" is stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, the passage of a predetermined period of time, etc.).

When hitting the right button twice, the special big win notification sound D2 [first sound D2 (scratch: 2 times) and second sound D2] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character B voice) is played from speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of special big win notification effect when hitting the second right button>
Figure 9-73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation images and presentation sounds of each presentation related to the special jackpot notification presentation when the second right hit is made.

First, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-73 (1) are the same as those in Figure 9-72 (1) described above, so we will not explain them here.

Then, the effect image in FIG. 9-73(2) is the same as that in FIG. 9-72(2) described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 plays and outputs effect sound D2 [first effect sound D1 (scratch: twice) and second effect sound D2] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character B voice) from speakers 8L and 8R. Since the Rush Mode: Nana Mode being controlled is an effect in which character B mainly appears, the effect sound when it is announced that the display result is a "hit" is an effect sound related to character B (character B's character voice).

Next, the images and sounds produced in FIG. 9-73 (3) are the same as those in FIG. 9-72 (3) described above, so a description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-73, when the special jackpot notification effect is executed on the second right hit, the first sound effect D2 is scratched twice and played back from speakers 8L and 8R, so sound effect D2 is played back as "Vi, Vi, Victory."

[3rd right hit big win notification effect]
The third right-hit jackpot notification effect is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result when the presentation mode is rush mode: jam mode, the display result (jackpot type) is either "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". The third right-hit jackpot notification effect is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result when the presentation mode is rush mode: jam mode, the display result (jackpot type) is either "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". The third right-hit jackpot notification effect is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result when the display ...

When hitting the right button for the third time, the big win notification effect will play non-scratch sound D3 [first sound effect D3 and second sound effect D3] "Victory" (character C voice) from speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of the big win notification effect when hitting the third right button>
Figure 9-74 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation images and presentation sounds of each presentation related to the jackpot notification presentation when the third right hit is made.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-74 (1), when a "3" decorative symbol is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 to create a reach state, at the timing when an operation prompting display in a variable pattern should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display BT in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, push button 31B). The other performance images are the same as those in FIG. 9-59 (3C), so their explanation will be omitted.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs performance sound I3 "Push" (character C's voice) from speakers 8L and 8R. Since the rush mode:jam mode being controlled is a performance in which character C mainly appears, the performance sound when the operation prompt display is displayed is a performance sound related to character C (character C's character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-74(2), when the player operates the operation unit, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes a presentation for informing the player of a big win on the third right hit, and stops and displays a combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") that results in a "win" display in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation plays and outputs presentation sound D3 [first presentation sound D3 and second presentation sound D3] "Victory" (character C voice) from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the rush mode:jam mode during control, character C is the main character, so the presentation sound when it is announced that the display result is a "win" is a presentation sound related to character C (character C's character voice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-74 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the decorative symbol combination (in this example, "333") that results in a "win" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 erases the active display AC in the active display area ACE, corresponding to the fact that a variable display is not currently being executed. The performance control CPU 120 also ends the playback output of any performance sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 9-74, when the big win notification effect is executed on the third right hit, sound effect D3 "Victory" (character C voice), which does not cause any sound effects to scratch, is played and output.

[Special big win notification when hitting the third right button]
The third right-hit special jackpot notification effect is a type of jackpot notification effect that is executed when notifying the display result when the presentation mode is rush mode: jam mode, the display result (jackpot type) is "10R jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". The second right-hit special jackpot notification effect is a combination of decorative symbols that indicate the display result will be "hit" and are displayed in a stopped state in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at a predetermined opportunity (operation of the push button 31B, the passage of a predetermined period of time, etc.).

When hitting the third right button, the special big win notification effect will play sound effect D3 [first sound effect D3 (scratch: 2 times) and second sound effect D3] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character C voice) from speakers 8L and 8R.

<Example of special big win notification when hitting the third right button>
Figure 9-75 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation images and presentation sounds of each presentation related to the special jackpot announcement presentation when the third right hit is made.

First, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-75 (1) are the same as those in Figure 9-74 (1) described above, so we will not explain them here.

Then, the effect image in FIG. 9-75(2) is the same as that in FIG. 9-74(2) described above, so the explanation will be omitted. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 plays and outputs effect sound D3 [first effect sound D3 (scratch: twice) and second effect sound D3] "Vi, Vi, Victory" (character C voice) from speakers 8L, 8R. Since the rush mode:jam mode being controlled is an effect in which character C mainly appears, the effect sound when it is announced that the display result is a "hit" is an effect sound related to character C (character C's character voice).

Next, the images and sounds produced in FIG. 9-75(3) are the same as those in FIG. 9-74(3) described above, so a description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-75, when the special jackpot notification effect is executed on the third right hit, the first sound effect D3 is scratched twice and played back from speakers 8L and 8R, so sound effect D3 is played back as "Vi, Vi, Victory."

[Playback output period of the performance sound in the big win notification performance]
FIG. 9-76 is a diagram showing a table for explaining the playback output period of the sound in the big win notification effect (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as the "table of playback output period of the sound of the big win notification effect"). The table of playback output period of the sound of the big win notification effect shows the type of the sound, the composition type of the sound, the playback output period for each composition type of the sound, and the total output period for each type of the sound for each type of the sound for each type of the big win notification effect. FIG. 9-76 shows specific examples of the type of the sound, the composition type of the sound, the playback output period for each composition type of the sound, and the total output period for each type of the sound ...

・First normal big win notification:
First performance sound C1 (0.25S) x 4 + (first performance sound C1 + second performance sound C1 (5.25S)) = total output period (6.25S)

・Second normal big win notification effect:
First performance sound C2 (0.25S) x 4 + (first performance sound C2 + second performance sound C2 (5.25S)) = total output period (6.25S)

・Third normal time big win notification effect:
First performance sound C3 (0.25S) x 4 + (first performance sound C3 + second performance sound C3 (5.25S)) = total output period (6.25S)

・First right hit jackpot announcement:
First effect sound D1 + second effect sound D1 (5.25S) = total output period (5.25S)

・Special jackpot announcement on first right hit:
First effect sound D1 (0.25S) x 2 + (first effect sound D1 + second effect sound D1 (5.25S)) = total output period (5.75S)

・Second right hit jackpot notification:
First effect sound D2 + second effect sound D2 (5.25S) = total output period (5.25S)

・Special jackpot announcement when hitting the second right button:
First effect sound D2 (0.25S) x 2 + (first effect sound D2 + second effect sound D2 (5.25S)) = total output period (5.75S)

・3rd right hit big win notification:
First effect sound D3 + second effect sound D3 (5.25S) = total output period (5.25S)

・Special jackpot announcement when hitting the third right button:
First effect sound D3 (0.25S) x 2 + (first effect sound D3 + second effect sound D3 (5.25S)) = total output period (5.75S)

[Example of a series of effects in this embodiment]
Next, using Figures 9-77 to 9-83, we will explain an example of the presentation when a first hit occurs in normal mode, followed by a jackpot in challenge mode, and V stock occurs during that jackpot.

Figures 9-77 to 9-79 are time charts showing the execution timing of each effect related to when a jackpot occurs in challenge mode after a first hit occurs in normal mode and a V stock occurs during the jackpot, and Figures 9-80 to 9-83 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to when a jackpot occurs in challenge mode after a first hit occurs in normal mode and a V stock occurs during the jackpot.

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to the normal mode, a display of the first special pattern with a display result of "jackpot" and a variation pattern of "SP-C1 jackpot" is executed, and in this variation display, a change precursor presentation, a special change presentation, a story SP development presentation, and a third normal time jackpot notification presentation, etc. are executed.

In addition, when the presentation mode is controlled to the challenge mode, the display result of the first time the time-saving state is reached will be a "small win", and the display result of one of the reserved memories that occurs during this time-saving state will also be a "small win", and in the case of a big win that occurs during the challenge mode, the first V stock presentation and the time-saving entry presentation will be executed.

When the presentation mode is controlled to the rush mode, the second V stock presentation and the first right hit jackpot notification presentation are executed. Also, when a V win occurs in a small jackpot game state that is the target of V stock, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and the jackpot type notification presentation is executed.

First, the image and sound effects (Figure 9-77: T1) in Figure 9-80 (1) are the same as those in Figure 9-19 (1) described above, so we will omit the explanation.

Next, the image and sound effects (Figure 9-77: T2) in Figure 9-80 (2) are the same as those in Figure 9-19 (2) described above, so we will not explain them here.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-80 (3) (Figure 9-77: T3) are the same as those in Figure 9-20 (5) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the effect images and effect sounds in Figure 9-80 (4) to (7) (Figure 9-77: T5, T6, T7, T8) are the same as those in Figure 9-27 (1), (4), (7), and (8) described above, so their explanation will be omitted. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a red active display AC2 in the active display area ACE.

Next, the presentation images and presentation sounds (Fig. 9-77: T9, T10) in Fig. 9-80 (8) and Fig. 9-81 (9) are the same as those in Fig. 9-38 (1) and (2) described above, so a description will be omitted. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a red active display AC2 in the active display area ACE.

Next, the effect image and effect sound (Figure 9-77: T11) in Figure 9-81 (10) are the same as those in Figure 9-41 (11) described above, so a description will be omitted. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a red active display AC2 in the active display area ACE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-81 (11), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 confirms and stops the combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") that results in a "jackpot" display in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9-77: T12). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 erases the active display AC from the active display area ACE, based on the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-81 (12) (Figure 9-78: T13) are the same as those in Figure 9-49 (3A) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the image and sound effects (Figure 9-78: T14) in Figure 9-81 (13) are the same as those in Figure 9-45 (A): (1) described above, so we will not repeat the explanation.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-81 (14) (Figure 9-78: T15) are the same as those in Figure 9-12 (3) described above, so a description will be omitted.

Next, the images and sounds (T22, T23 in Fig. 9-78) in Fig. 9-81 (15) and (16) are similar to those in Fig. 9-45 (B): (1) and (2) described above, so a description will be omitted.

Next, the image and sound effects in FIG. 9-82 (17) (FIG. 9-78: T24) are the same as those in FIG. 9-49 (1) described above, so a description will be omitted.

Next, the image and sound effects in FIG. 9-82 (18) (FIG. 9-78: T25) are the same as those in FIG. 9-51 (2) described above, so a description will be omitted.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-82 (19) (Figure 9-78: T26) are the same as those in Figure 9-53 (9) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-82 (20) (Figure 9-78: T27) are the same as those in Figure 9-65 (1) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the image and sound effects in FIG. 9-82 (21) (FIG. 9-78: T28) are the same as those in FIG. 9-12 (5) described above, so a description will be omitted.

Next, the presentation image and sound (Figure 9-79: T29) in Figure 9-82 (22) are the same as those in Figure 9-64 (2) described above, so a description will be omitted. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays three normal-type second hold displays in the special second hold display guide PD2G in the second hold display area PD2E, based on the fact that the second hold memory count is three.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-82 (23), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be displayed in a static state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays a combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") that results in a "small win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9-79: T32). At this time, the variable display of the second special symbol continues in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. Also, since the V stock release performance has been performed, the V stock number display VNI at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 has been erased. The other performance images and performance sounds are the same as those in FIG. 9-82 (22) described above, so their explanations will be omitted.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-82 (24) (Figure 9-79: T35) are the same as those in Figure 9-64 (4) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-83 (25) (Figure 9-79: T36) are the same as those in Figure 9-45 (B): (2) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-83 (26) (Figure 9-79: T37) are the same as those in Figure 9-49 (1) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the images and sounds produced in Figure 9-83 (27) (Figure 9-79: T39) are the same as those in Figure 9-64 (5) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

(Effect 1)
As shown in Figures 9-28 to 9-30, in the story SP development performance, when character A whose display color is yellow and character A whose display color is purple, which is complementary to yellow, are displayed alternately twice each, a scratch process is executed in which the first performance sound G "pa" is scratched four times, and the performance sound G "pa, pa, pa, pa, powerful" is played back and output.

With this configuration, when the first sound effect G is played back multiple times during the story SP development performance, character A, whose display color is yellow, and character A, whose display color is purple, which is complementary to yellow, are displayed multiple times in response to the playback output of this first sound effect G, creating a sense of unity between the sound and video in the gaming machine, and by alternately displaying character A in colors that are complementary to yellow, the display color of character A can be made to look even more vivid, thereby increasing interest when the story SP development performance is executed.

(Effect 2)
As shown in Figures 9-50, 9-51 to 9-53, and 9-54 to 9-57, during a jackpot game state, when the first V stock performance (first reserved consecutive performance) is not being executed, song A (song B or song C) that has not been scratched is played back and output from speakers 8L, 8R, whereas during a jackpot game state, when the first V stock performance is being executed, song X that has been scratched is played back and output from speakers 8L, 8R.

With this configuration, when the first reserved consecutive performance is executed during a jackpot game, a special song (song X) different from the normal songs (songs A to C) that are played during a jackpot game in which the first reserved consecutive performance is not executed is played, thereby enhancing the special feeling of the first reserved consecutive performance. Also, by scratching a portion of the song that is played when it is suggested that a reserved consecutive performance is occurring (song data X1 of song X), the song that is played when the first reserved consecutive performance is executed can be made to impress upon the player.

(Effect 3)
As shown in Figures 9-50, 9-51 to 9-53, and 9-54 to 9-57, in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock performance (first pending consecutive performance) is not being executed, song A (song B or song C) is played and output from speakers 8L, 8R as the music during the jackpot game, while in the jackpot game state, when the first V stock performance is being executed, song X is played and output from speakers 8L, 8R as the music during the jackpot game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-62, when the time-saving state is controlled and the presentation mode is controlled to rush mode, song A (song B or song C) is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R as the music during rush mode when the second V stock presentation (second reserved consecutive presentation) is not being executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-63, when the time-saving state is controlled and the presentation mode is controlled to rush mode, song X is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R as the music during rush mode when the second V stock presentation (second reserved consecutive presentation) is being executed.

With this configuration, when the first consecutive hold performance is executed during a jackpot game, a special song (song X) different from the normal songs (songs A to C) that are played during a jackpot game in which the first consecutive hold performance is not executed is played, thereby enhancing the special feeling of the first consecutive hold performance. Also, when the consecutive hold performances (first consecutive hold performance, second consecutive hold performance) are executed, a common song is played from the jackpot game to the time-saving game (rush mode, appropriately referred to as "time-saving game"), preventing a decrease in interest due to the song being changed when switching from the jackpot game to the time-saving game.

(Effect 3-1)
As shown in Figure 9-50, during a jackpot game state, when the first V stock effect (first reserved consecutive effect) is not being executed, it is possible to select either song A, song B or song C as the music during the jackpot game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-62, when the time-saving state is controlled and the presentation mode is controlled to the rush mode, when the second V stock presentation (second reserved consecutive presentation) is not being executed, it is possible to select either song A, song B or song C as the music during the rush mode.

With this configuration, during the normal jackpot play period when the V Stock performance is not executed, or during the normal time-saving play period when the V Stock performance is not executed, music X, which is a dedicated music piece when the V Stock performance is executed, is not played, thereby enhancing the sense of exclusivity and premium when the V Stock performance is executed and music X is played.

(Effect 3-2)
As shown in Figures 9-51 to 9-53 and Figure 9-63, when the first V stock effect is executed during a jackpot game, the rainbow-colored caption display TI and V stock number display VNI displayed on the image display device 5, and the music X played and output from the speakers 8L, 8R are the same as the rainbow-colored caption display TI and V stock number display VNI displayed on the image display device 5, and the music X played and output from the speakers 8L, 8R when the second V stock effect is executed during a time-saving game.

This configuration allows the effects to be seamless from the big win to the time-saving play, emphasizing the continuous occurrence of "wins" and enhancing the special feeling when a series of reserved wins occurs.

(Effect 3-3)
As shown in Figure 9-64, if the type of the previous "jackpot" in which the V stock effect (first reserved consecutive effect) was executed was a "10R jackpot" (i.e., if the round display for the jackpot round game is displayed from "1 ROUND" to "10 ROUND"), in the small jackpot game or jackpot round game corresponding to the "jackpot" that is the target of the V stock effect that occurs subsequently, the round display will be displayed from "11 ROUND".

With this configuration, in this pachinko game machine 1, where the maximum number of rounds in one "jackpot" is "10," by displaying "11" or more rounds, which is not possible in normal jackpot play, it is possible to give the player a sense of exclusivity in the reserved streak, and it is possible to make the flow from the previous "jackpot" to the "jackpot" based on the reserved streak appear seamless, making it appear as if the jackpot is continuing, and increasing the excitement of the jackpot when the reserved streak is executed.

(Effect 3-4)
As shown in Figures 9-53 (8) and (9), at a predetermined opportunity (such as operation of the push button 31B or passage of a predetermined period of time), a V stock number display VNI (in this example, "V STOCK x 1"), which is information indicating the V stock number (reserved consecutive number), is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, at the timing when a round game (first round) in a jackpot game state is started, a reduced V stock number display VNI (in this example, "V STOCK x 1") is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

This configuration gives the player a sense of accomplishment and security by informing them of how many "winning" reserved memories there are among the reserved memories.

(Effect 3-5)
As shown in FIG. 9-49, regardless of whether the V stock effect (reserved consecutive effect) is executed or not, the jackpot type notification effect is executed during the jackpot FF period in the jackpot game state. If the third jackpot type "V STOCK BONUS" is notified in the jackpot type notification effect, the first V stock effect (first reserved consecutive effect) is executed within the jackpot FF period, and even if the first jackpot type "BONUS" or the second jackpot type "MAX BONUS" is notified in the jackpot type notification effect, the first V stock effect may be executed within the jackpot RD period.

In this way, before the first reserved consecutive play performance is executed, a jackpot type notification performance is executed to arouse interest in whether or not the first reserved consecutive play performance will be executed. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the jackpot type notification performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 3-6)
As shown in Figures 9-62 and 9-63, in the time-saving state in which the second V stock performance (second reserved consecutive performance) is not being executed, a simple active display guide is displayed in the active display area, and no guide is displayed in the second reserved display area, while in the time-saving state in which the second V stock performance is being executed, a gorgeous special active display guide ACG is displayed in the active display area, and a gorgeous special second reserved display guide PD2G is displayed in the second reserved display area. Also, in the time-saving state in which the second V stock performance is not being executed, the background image does not include a rainbow-colored telop display TI, while in the time-saving state in which the second V stock performance is being executed, the background image includes a rainbow-colored telop display TI.

With this configuration, depending on whether or not the second V stock effect is executed, not only the effect image related to the variable display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 but also the interface is changed, making it possible to emphasize the special feeling that a V stock (a series of reserved hits) has occurred.

(Effect 3-7)
As shown in Fig. 9-8 and Fig. 9-51 to Fig. 9-53, when the first V stock effect (first reserved consecutive effect) is being executed during a jackpot game, the scratch process is executed for the music X played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, in which [music data X1] "We" (impact: strong) is played and output four times in a row. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 9-50, when the first V stock effect (first reserved consecutive effect) is not being executed during a jackpot game, the scratch process is not executed for the music A (music B or music C) (impact: weak) played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

With this configuration, when a V stock (a series of reserved hits) occurs, a specially processed (scratch processed) sound that differs from the normal sound configuration is played and output, enhancing the special feeling that a V stock has occurred. Also, by repeatedly playing and outputting the opening song of song X, [song data X1] "We" (impact: strong), the impact of the sound at the beginning of the song is strengthened, making an impression on the player of the song that occurs when a V stock occurs. Listening to this song motivates the player to play, which promotes operation.

(Effect 3-8)
As described above, when the scratch process is executed to play and output the first sound effect "pa" four times in succession from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to cause the game effect lamp 9 to light up in accordance with the timing of the playback and output of the first sound effect.

With this configuration, the sound from speakers 8L, 8R and the presentation using a presentation device (game effect lamp) different from speakers 8L, 8R are interrelated, improving the presentation effect of the scratch process and realizing a presentation that appeals not only to the player's hearing but also to their vision.

(Effect 3-9)
As shown in Fig. 9-8, the music X of "CH04" and "CH05" is composed of [music data X1] and [music data X2]. Also, as shown in Fig. 9-51 to Fig. 9-53, when the first V stock effect (first reserved consecutive effect) is executed during a big win game, the music X that is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is [music data X1] "We" (impact: strong) played and output four times in a row, followed by [music data X1] and [music data X2] "Welcome Lucky (omitted)".

With this configuration, the processing load of audio control during scratch processing can be reduced by continuously playing and outputting the first audio data out of the first audio data and the second audio data that make up the audio.

(Effect 3-10)
As shown in Figure 9-8, the basic volume of both [song data X1] and [song data X2] of song X is fixed at "3". Therefore, when a scratch process is executed in which [song data X1] "Weh" is played and output four times in succession, and then [song data X1] and [song data X2] "Welcome Lucky (omitted)" are played and output, when the volume value is constant, the output volume of each song data that makes up song X is constant.

With this configuration, the base volume is constant, so the output volume of each piece of music data that makes up song X is constant, preventing a decrease in clarity in only certain parts of song X.

(Effect 3-11)
As shown in Figures 9-51 to 9-53, when the first V stock effect (first consecutive reserved effect) is being executed during a jackpot game, a scratch process is executed in which the effect sound A played and output from speakers 8L and 8R is the first effect sound A, in which the sound "bu" is played and output four times in succession.

In addition, as shown above, when [first performance sound A] is played back four times in succession with scratch processing, the basic volume increases with each output, from the first [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 1), the second [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 2), the third [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 3), to the fourth [first performance sound A] (basic volume: 4), and it is possible to increase the basic volume and output volume accordingly.

With this configuration, when the first V stock performance (first consecutive reserved performance) is executed, the output volume of the performance sound A that is played back increases gradually, thereby increasing the interest of the first V stock performance.

(Effect 3-12)
As described above, when the second sound effect A is played back after the first sound effect A accompanied by scratch processing, the channel setting ratio of the second sound effect A "istok" is gradually decreased from "1 (100%)" to "0 (0%)" and faded out, thereby making it possible to reduce the output volume over time.

With this configuration, the output volume of the sound played during the first V stock performance (first consecutive reserved play performance) is gradually reduced rather than suddenly reduced, allowing the player to feel a lingering sense of joy at the occurrence of a V stock (consecutive reserved play) and preventing a decline in interest in the first V stock performance.

(Effect 4)
As shown in Figure 9-50, during a jackpot game state, when the first V stock effect (first pending consecutive effect, first next confirmation effect) is not being executed, a special operation promotion display BT2 is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and it is possible to select either song A, song B or song C as the music during the jackpot game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-53, when the first V stock effect (first reserved consecutive effect, first next confirmation effect) is being executed during a jackpot game, the special operation prompt display BT2 is not displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a song other than song X cannot be selected as the song during the jackpot game.

With this configuration, when the first V stock performance is being executed, music X, which is dedicated to the occurrence of a V stock, is played back, thereby enhancing the special feeling of the first V stock performance. In addition, by restricting the selection of music other than music X when the first V stock performance is being executed, it is possible to prevent interest in the first V stock performance from waning due to the operation of selecting music.

(Effect 4-1)
As shown in Fig. 9-50, when the first V stock effect (first reserved consecutive effect, first next confirmation effect) is not being executed in the jackpot game state, a special operation prompt display BT2 and a song display (objects resembling musical notes and the name of the song) are displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This allows the player to select any one of Song A, Song B, or Song C as the song during the jackpot game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-53, when the first V stock effect (first reserved consecutive effect, first next confirmed effect) is being executed during a jackpot game, the special operation prompt display BT2 is not displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and only the music display is displayed. This prevents the player from selecting a music other than music X as the music during a jackpot game.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest caused by the display of the special operation prompting display BT2, which is information unrelated to the first V stock performance, when the first V stock performance is being executed.

(Effect 4-2)
As shown in Figures 9-54 to 9-57, during a jackpot round game, when a normal jackpot background image (a background image including a mountain, a sun, and musical notes) is displayed on the image display device 5, when the first V stock effect (first pending consecutive effect, first next confirmation effect) is executed, the normal jackpot background image is erased and effect images related to the first V stock effect (V stock displays VSI1, VSI2, VSI3, operation prompt display BT, V stock number display VSI) are displayed.

With this configuration, the first V stock effect can be suddenly executed during a jackpot round, giving the player a surprise and increasing the excitement of the jackpot game.

(Effect 4-3)
As shown in Figures 9-51 to 9-57, when the first V stock effect is executed, a first V stock display VSI1 consisting of the letter "V", a second V stock display VSI2 consisting of the letter "V", and a third V stock display VSI3 consisting of the letters "V STOCK" are displayed on the image display device 5 as information related to the [first effect sound A] "Bu" and the [second effect sound A] "I Stock" of the effect sound A played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

With this configuration, the occurrence of a V stock can be conveyed visually as well as audibly.

(Effect 4-4)
As shown in Figures 9-54 to 9-57, before the first V stock performance of the first round (round display = 2 ROUND) during a jackpot game is executed, music A is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and when the first V stock performance of the second round (round display = 3 ROUND) during a jackpot game is executed, music X is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. And even after the display of the V stock number display VNI in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 in the first V stock performance of the third round (round display = 4 ROUND) during a jackpot game ends, music X continues to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, changing the music is restricted.

With this configuration, the music X that was played when the first V stock performance started continues to be played, so that the player can be continually notified that a V stock is occurring and the special feeling of playing the big win round can be enhanced.

(Effect 4-5)
As described above, when the first V stock effect is executed, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound A to be reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%. On the other hand, the channel setting ratio of the music X to be reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 20%.

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the clarity of the music X while improving the clarity of the performance sound A, thereby improving the performance effect of the characteristic performance sound of the first V stock performance.

(Effects 4-6)
As shown in Figure 9-8, when the sound effect A of the first V stock is played out, when a sound effect A including [first sound effect A1] and [second sound effect A1] (hereinafter referred to as "sound effect A1" as appropriate) is played out, it suggests that the jackpot type of the reserved memory that is the target of the V stock is a "10R jackpot", and when a sound effect A including [first sound effect A2] and [second sound effect A2] (hereinafter referred to as "sound effect A2" as appropriate) is played out, it suggests that the jackpot type of the reserved memory that is the target of the V stock is a "3R jackpot".

This configuration allows the viewer to focus on not only the dialogue sounds but also the sound effects, increasing the interest of the first V stock performance.

(Effect 5)
As shown in Fig. 9-31, in the first half of the battle SP in the battle SP performance, a CU performance (first movable body performance) in which the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position can be executed, and when the CU performance is executed, the visibility of the performance image related to the battle SP displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is reduced. At this time, the performance sound B is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R without being scratched.

In addition, as shown in Figures 9-34 to 9-37, in the latter half of the battle SP in the battle SP performance, a second normal time jackpot notification performance (second movable body performance) can be executed in which the movable body YM moves from the initial position to the second operating position, and when the second normal time jackpot notification performance is executed, the visibility of the performance image related to the battle SP displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is reduced. At this time, the performance sound C2 is scratched and played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that reduces the visibility of the image display device 5 by having the movable body perform a common operation for the CU effect, which indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, and the second normal time jackpot notification effect, which notifies whether or not a jackpot has occurred. However, by having only the second normal time jackpot notification effect perform scratch processing on the effect sound, it is possible to reduce the production costs of the effect and the processing burden of effect control (movable body control) while clearly distinguishing between the CU effect and the second normal time jackpot notification effect.

(Effect 5-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-8, the sound effect B played and output in the "CH08": CU performance does not include dialogue sounds and is composed only of sound effects ([Sound effect B]), and the sound effect C2 played and output in the "CH11" and "CH12": second normal time jackpot notification performance is composed of dialogue sounds ([First dialogue sound C2] "Vi" (impact: strong) and [Second dialogue sound C2] "Ctory" (impact: weak)) and sound effects ([First sound effect C]).

With this configuration, when announcing that the display result is a "jackpot", a scratch-processed sound effect different from the normal sound effect is played back, enhancing the special feeling when announcing a jackpot. In addition, the first line sound C2 "Vi" (strong impact) at the beginning of the sound effect C2 is repeatedly played back, strengthening the impact of the sound at the beginning of the sound effect, and leaving a strong impression on the player of the sound effect when announcing a jackpot. Hearing this sound effect motivates the player to play, which promotes operation.

(Effect 5-2)
As shown in Figures 9-34 to 9-38, when the second normal time jackpot notification effect is executed, the playback output interval between the first [first effect sound C2] "Vi" and the second [first effect sound C2] "Vi" is 0.5S (first blackout period), the playback output interval between the second [first effect sound C2] "Vi" and the third [first effect sound C2] "Vi" is 0.4S (second blackout period), the playback output interval between the third [first effect sound C2] "Vi" and the fourth [first effect sound C2] "Vi" is 0.3S (third blackout period), and the playback output interval between the fourth [first effect sound C2] "Vi" and the [first effect sound C2] and [second effect sound C2] "Victory" is 0.2S (fourth blackout period).

In this way, the sound effect C2 is a sound effect in which the [first sound effect C2] "Vi" is scratched multiple times (four times) in succession with the scratch intervals gradually shortened, and then the [first sound effect C2] and the [second sound effect C2] "Victory" are played and output after a mute period of 0.2 seconds.

With this configuration, when the second normal time jackpot notification effect is executed, scratch-processed sound effect C2 is played back, enhancing the special feeling of the second normal time jackpot notification effect. Also, by scratching sound effect C2, the sound effect when the second normal time jackpot notification effect is executed can impress the player.

In addition, when scratch processing of sound effect C2 is executed, the scratch interval becomes gradually shorter, so that the peak of excitement can be reached just before the final part of sound effect C2, [first sound effect C2] and [second sound effect C2] "Victory", are played and output. Then, after this peak of excitement, there is a brief moment (a mute period of 0.2 seconds) before the final part of sound effect C2, [first sound effect C2] and [second sound effect C2] "Victory", are played and output, making it possible to play and output an even more memorable sound effect.

(Effect 5-3)
As shown in Fig. 9-31, before the CU performance is executed, no operation prompt display is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the player is not prompted to operate the operation unit. On the other hand, as shown in Figs. 9-34 to 9-38, before the second normal time jackpot notification performance is executed, an operation prompt display is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the player is prompted to operate the operation unit.

With this configuration, the player can operate the operation unit to execute the second normal time jackpot notification effect and move the movable body, making the player feel as if he or she has grabbed the jackpot with their own hands, increasing the player's interest.

(Effect 6)
As shown in FIG. 9-76, in the normal time jackpot notification effects (first normal time jackpot notification effect, second normal time jackpot notification effect, third normal time jackpot notification effect) executed in normal time (normal state), the effect sounds (effect sounds C1, C2, C3, hereinafter referred to as "normal time jackpot notification sounds" as appropriate) are scratched and played back. On the other hand, in the right hit jackpot notification effects (first right hit jackpot notification effect, second right hit jackpot notification effect, third right hit jackpot notification effect) executed in right hit (rush mode), the effect sounds (effect sounds D1, D2, D3, hereinafter referred to as "right hit jackpot notification sounds" as appropriate) are played back without being scratched.

In addition, the playback output period of the right-hit jackpot notification sound is 5.25 S in all cases, and the playback output period of the normal jackpot notification sound is 6.25 S in all cases, so the right-hit jackpot notification sound has a shorter playback output period than the normal jackpot notification sound.

With this configuration, in the normal time jackpot notification effect that notifies the player that the display result is a "jackpot" (first hit) during normal times, a scratch processed sound effect (normal time jackpot notification sound) is played and output, thereby increasing the impact of the first hit. Also, in the right hit jackpot notification effect that notifies the player that the display result is a "jackpot" during right hit (rush mode), a sound effect (right hit jackpot notification sound) that has not been scratch processed and has a shorter playback output period than the normal time jackpot notification sound is played and output, thereby preventing a decrease in the sense of speed and exhilaration during right hits.

(Effect 6-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-76, the right-hitting jackpot notification sound has a shorter playback output period than the normal jackpot notification sound. In other words, the right-hitting jackpot notification performance has a shorter performance execution period than the normal jackpot notification performance.

With this configuration, by shortening the performance execution period of the right-hit jackpot notification performance that is executed during right-hit, the interval between jackpots becomes even shorter than when a jackpot notification performance with a long performance execution period is executed, making it possible to provide continuity in the jackpots and providing the player with a dynamic gameplay.

(Effect 6-2)
As shown in Fig. 9-8, as normal jackpot notification sounds, there are provided a sound effect C1 for "CH09" and "CH10", a sound effect C2 for "CH11" and "CH12", and a sound effect C3 for "CH13" and "CH14", and as right-hitting jackpot notification sounds, there are provided a sound effect D1 for "CH15" and "CH16", a sound effect D2 for "CH17" and "CH18", and a sound effect D3 for "CH19" and "CH20". Also, as shown in Fig. 9-9, there is provided a sound effect K for "CH40" as a sudden jackpot notification effect (premium effect).

With this configuration, a jackpot notification sound that is different from the normal jackpot notification sound and the right-hit jackpot notification sound is provided, which draws attention to periods other than the super reach in the variable display, increasing interest.

(Effect 7)
As shown in FIG. 9-16, when the final display mode of the active display is a blue mode, and when the change pattern is any of the change patterns, the normal change presentation is executed 100% of the time, and the special change presentation is not executed. When the final display mode of the active display is a red mode, and when the change pattern is any of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, and 401, the normal change presentation is executed 30% of the time, and the special change presentation is executed 70% of the time. When the final display mode of the active display is a gold mode, and when the change pattern is any of the change patterns 101, 201, 301, and 401, the normal change presentation is executed 10% of the time, and the special change presentation is executed 90% of the time.

In other words, when a normal change effect is performed, there is a possibility that the final display mode of the active display will change to a blue mode, which has a low probability of winning, but when a special change effect is performed, there is no possibility that the final display mode of the active display will change to a blue mode, which has a low probability of winning, and it will change to either a red mode or a gold mode, which has a high probability of winning.

As shown in Figure 9-17, before the normal change effect is executed, no effects are executed, and the scratched effect sound is not played back from speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 9-19 to 9-22, before the special change effect is executed, the change precursor effect: success pattern is executed, and the scratched effect sound EA "Ready, go, go, go, go, go" is played back from speakers 8L and 8R.

With this configuration, the sound effect EA is played back, suggesting that a special variation effect that has a higher chance of winning than a normal variation effect will be executed, so the player can pay attention to whether or not the sound effect EA is played back, increasing interest.

(Effect 7-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-18, a change premonition effect having a success pattern and a failure pattern can be executed, and as shown in FIG. 9-19 to FIG. 9-22, when a change premonition effect of a success pattern is executed in which the scratch-processed effect sound EA "Ready, go, go, go, go, go" is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, a special change effect is executed.

With this configuration, the execution of a change precursor effect can suggest that a special change effect, which has a higher probability of winning than a normal change effect, will be executed, so the player can pay attention to whether or not the effect sound EA is being played, increasing interest.

(Effect 7-2)
As shown in Figure 9-18 (3A), when the change precursor effect: success pattern is executed, the second effect sound EA is played back four times and the third effect sound EA is played back once, and the letter "GO" is superimposed on the active enlarged display EAC in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 a total of five times.

This configuration makes it possible to appeal to the player's sense of sight and hearing, providing a sense of exhilaration when the player recognizes that the premonition effect is a successful pattern and that a special change effect will be executed after this.

(Effect 7-3)
As shown in FIG. 9-18, when the change precursor effect: success pattern is executed, the word "READY" and the word "GO" are displayed, indicating that a special change effect will start.

This configuration can increase the sense of anticipation for the special change performance to be executed before the special change performance begins, and can increase the interest of the change performance that changes the display mode of the active display.

(Effect 7-4)
As shown in Figure 9-18, when a change premonition effect: success pattern is executed, the letters "GO" are displayed, indicating that a special change performance will begin, whereas when a change premonition effect: failure pattern is executed, the letters "GO" are not displayed, indicating that a special change performance will begin, and a cracked image CI is displayed, indicating that a special change performance will not begin.

With this configuration, by displaying the letters "GO" before the special change effect begins, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation that the special change effect will be executed, and to increase the interest of the change effect. Also, by displaying a crack image without displaying the letters "GO", it is possible to reliably notify the player that the special change effect will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

(Effect 7-5)
As shown in Figure 9-23, an R hold effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect, which notifies the player that a change precursor effect will be executed in the variable display that was the subject of judgment at the time of the start winning by displaying the hold display in an R mode.

With this configuration, an R-hold effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect before the change display in which a change precursor effect or special change effect is executed is executed, so that attention can be drawn to the change display before the change display is executed.

(Effect 7-6)
As shown in Figures 9-19 to 9-22, when the special change performance is executed, an active candidate display (e.g., a blue form, a red form, a gold form) is displayed ahead of the left and right course sections of the course display, and a "NEXT" icon is displayed ahead of the central course section of the course display to notify that proceeding to the next stage will be carried out.

With this configuration, by displaying two active candidate displays, the player can advance to the active candidate display with the higher probability of winning a jackpot, and play in the hope that the display mode of the active display will change to that display mode. Also, by displaying the "NEXT" icon, the player can play in the hope that the special change presentation will continue and advance to the next stage, and that an active candidate display with an even higher probability of winning a jackpot will be displayed.

The special change presentation differs from the normal change presentation in that a candidate active display showing what the changed active display will be is presented before the active display changes, which increases interest in the stage before the active display actually changes. Also, because it can be expected that the active display will actually change and that the special change presentation will continue and progress to the next stage, it can increase interest even more than the normal change presentation.

(Effect 8)
As shown in Figures 9-65 to 9-67, when the time-saving entry performance is executed, a third countdown image CDI3, a second countdown image CDI2, a first countdown image CDI1, and a start image JSI, which indicate that the time-saving state (rush mode) will be entered, are displayed on the image display device 5.

In response to the display of these effect images, the first effect sound F3 "three", the first effect sound F2 "two", the first effect sound F1 "one", the second effect sound F (scratch: 4 times), and the second effect sound F and the third effect sound F "s, s, s, s, start" are played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In particular, the word "START" on the start image is related to the second effect sound F (scratch: 4 times), and the second effect sound F and the third effect sound F "s, s, s, s, start".

With this configuration, when the time-saving state is entered, the scratched sound effect is played back, so that the player can be properly notified of the timing of the time-saving state control, preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

(Effect 8-1)
As shown in Figures 9-65 to 9-67, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state (rush mode), a time-saving entry effect is executed, which displays a start image JSI including letters "S,""T,""A,""R," and "T" indicating that the game is being controlled to the time-saving state (rush mode), the letters "START," and a countdown image (first countdown image CDI1 to third countdown image CDI3) including letters "3,""2," and "1" indicating that the start image JSI will be displayed, and the numbers "321."

When the start image is displayed, the second sound effect F "S" corresponding to the "S" in "START" is scratched four times in succession and played back, and the third sound effect F "Tart" corresponding to the "TART" in "START" is played back without being scratched.

With this configuration, in addition to the method of constantly displaying a right-hit promotion image on the image display device 5, which includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to win the second start winning hole, a method of playing and outputting scratched sound effect F from speakers 8L and 8R is provided as a method of informing the player of a right-hit, preventing the player from falling into an unfavorable situation in right-hit play.

(Effect 8-2)
As shown in Fig. 9-65 to Fig. 9-66 (5), when the time-saving entry presentation is executed in the jackpot game state, the third countdown image CDI3 is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen, and the start image JSI is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen. Also, as shown in Fig. 9-66 (6) to Fig. 9-67 (8), when the time-saving state is controlled, the character (A) CA is displayed while moving from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen. That is, the third countdown image CDI3, the start image JSI, and the character (A) CA are moving in the same direction (rightward).

With this configuration, by matching the direction of movement of the text information with the direction of movement of the character, the presentation on the image display device 5 when the game state changes can be made to look seamless and the presentation can be prevented from feeling unnatural.

(Effect 8-3)
As shown in FIG. 9-66(5), the start image JSI is an image including the word “START” and a right-pointing arrow object. This right-pointing arrow object suggests that a right-hand play will start.

With this configuration, by displaying an object with an arrow pointing to the right, in the jackpot game state where the time-saving entry effect is executed, it is possible to suggest the method of playing in the time-saving state (operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 in a clockwise direction), thereby preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

(Effect 8-4)
As shown in Fig. 9-65 (1), when the time-saving entry performance is executed, a rush mode explanatory image JRI is displayed on the image display device 5. The rush mode explanatory image is an image including information explaining how to play the rush mode ("Keep hitting to the right until there are 0 POWERFUL RUSHes remaining!"), a demo icon (an icon with the letters "DEMO" displayed) that indicates to the player that the game is not currently controlled to the time-saving state and that there is no need to operate the ball-hitting control handle 30, and the character A.

This configuration allows the player to recognize the right-hand play technique before right-hand play begins in the time-saving state, preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

(Effect 8-5)
As shown in FIG. 9-78, the time-saving entry effect is executed during the jackpot ED period in the jackpot game state.

With this configuration, before the game is controlled to the time-saving state, an explanation of right-hand play can be given and excitement for the upcoming right-hand play can be built, increasing the interest in right-hand play.

(Effect 9-1)
As shown in Figures 9-28 to 9-30, in the story SP development performance, when character A whose display color is yellow and character A whose display color is purple, which is complementary to yellow, are displayed alternately twice each, the first performance sound G ``pa'' is scratched four times to play out ``pa, pa, pa, pa (, powerful).''

With this configuration, by associating the effect image (video) displayed on the image display device 5 with the effect sound played back and output from the speakers 8L, 8R, it is possible to strengthen the sense of unity between the video and the sound, and to realize an effect that appeals to the player's senses of sight and hearing.

(Effect 9-2)
As shown in FIG. 9-28, when the story SP development performance is executed, before the first performance sound G "Pa" is scratched and played back, the performance sound G is muted and played back.

With this configuration, the scratched first sound effect G "Pa" is played back after the muted sound effect G, giving the player an impression of the story SP development performance.

(Effect 9-3)
As shown in Figures 9-28 to 9-30, in the story SP development presentation, character A, whose display color is yellow, and character A, whose color is purple, which is a complementary color to yellow on the color wheel, are displayed alternately twice each.

This configuration makes it possible to increase the saturation of the alternately displayed color of character A, making it appear even more vivid, thereby increasing the interest of the story SP development presentation.

(Effect 9-4)
As described above, in the story SP development performance, when character A, whose display color is inverted in brightness or gradation, is displayed alternately twice each, the scratch-processed performance sound G "Pa, pa, pa, pa, powerful" may be played back.

This configuration makes it possible to increase the saturation of the alternately displayed color of character A, making it appear even more vivid, thereby increasing the interest of the story SP development presentation.

(Effect 9-5)
As described above, in the story SP development presentation, three types of characters A, namely, a yellow character A, a red character A, and a blue character A, may be displayed in sequence.

This configuration makes it possible to increase the saturation of the display color of character A compared to when two colors of character A are displayed alternately, making it appear even more vivid, thereby increasing the interest of the story SP development presentation.

(Effect 9-6)
As described above, in the story SP development presentation, when two types of characters A, a yellow character A and a purple character A, are displayed alternately, the display size of the yellow character A may be small and the display size of the purple character A may be large.

This configuration makes it possible to make a stronger impression on character A than when character A of the same display size is displayed alternately with only the display color changed, further increasing the interest of the story SP development presentation.

(Effect 9-7)
As shown in Figures 9-28 to 9-30, in the story SP development presentation, when character A is displayed alternately in complementary inverted display colors, the display colors of the small patterns in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, which serve as information for checking the progress of the game, and the active display AC in the normal mode of the active display area ACE, are not all complementary inverted.

This configuration prevents players from becoming confused by not changing the display color of the information used to check the game progress.

(Effect 10)
As shown in Figures 9-32 and 9-33, when the first normal time jackpot notification performance is executed as a jackpot notification performance during the challenge SP, a scratch-processed sound C1 is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, as shown in Figures 9-34 to 9-37, when the second normal jackpot notification effect is being executed as a jackpot notification effect during the Battle SP, scratch-processed sound effect C2 is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the first production sound C1 in "CH09": the production sound C1 that is scratched is composed of the first dialogue sound C1 "Ko" and the first sound effect C, and the first production sound C2 in "CH11": the production sound C2 that is scratched is composed of the first dialogue sound C2 "Vi" and the first sound effect C, and the sound effect of the first production sound C1 and the first production sound C2 is common to the sound effect C.

With this configuration, multiple types of jackpot notification effects are provided as jackpot notification effects that notify the user that the display result is a "jackpot," which can increase interest compared to when only one type of jackpot notification effect is executed. In addition, in multiple types of jackpot notification effects, only the dialogue sounds are set individually and the sound effects are shared, which can reduce the production costs of the effects and the storage capacity required for the effects while differentiating the jackpot notification effects.

(Effect 10-1)
As shown in Figures 9-32 and 9-33, the first normal time jackpot notification effect is executed as the jackpot notification effect in the variation pattern with the super reach of the challenge SP. Also, as shown in Figures 9-34 to 9-37, the second normal time jackpot notification effect is executed as the jackpot notification effect in the variation pattern with the super reach of the battle SP.

With this configuration, the jackpot notification effect differs for each type of super reach, so that the player is motivated to play in order to trigger the jackpot notification effect for a specific super reach.

(Effect 10-2)
In this embodiment, in the performance sound C1 scratched in the first normal time big win notification performance, the sound effect (first sound effect C, second sound effect C) has a longer playback output period than the dialogue sound (first dialogue sound C1, second dialogue sound C1). The same is true for the performance sound C2 scratched in the second normal time big win notification performance and the performance sound C3 scratched in the third normal time big win notification performance.

With this configuration, in the scratch-processed sound produced during the normal jackpot notification performance, the sound effects have a longer playback output period than the dialogue sounds, allowing the player to enjoy the lingering joy of seeing the display result of a "jackpot" during normal play, enhancing the interest of the jackpot notification performance.

(Effect 10-3)
As shown in Fig. 9-32 and Fig. 9-33, when the operation prompting display BT is displayed before the big win notification display during the challenge SP, the sound effect I2 "Push" (character B voice) is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The character that mainly appears in the challenge SP and the character of the character voice of the sound effect when the operation prompting display BT is displayed are the same as character B.

As shown in Figures 9-34 to 9-37, when the operation prompt display BT is displayed before the big win notification display during the battle SP, the sound effect I1 "Push" (character A voice) is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R. The character that mainly appears in the battle SP and the character whose character voice is used for the sound effect when the operation prompt display BT is displayed are the same (character A).

With this configuration, it is possible to differentiate the Super Reach effects by providing a unique sound effect when the operation prompt display is displayed and a unique sound to notify of a jackpot for each Super Reach effect. In addition, players who like a particular character can play the game in the hope of seeing that character appear in video or audio.

(Effect 10-4)
As shown in FIG. 9-69, in the annihilation SP presentation, a new presentation sound H is played and output each time the player operates the operation unit, and the presentation sound H that the player has simulated scratching at any timing is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

With this configuration, the scratch-processed sound effect can be played back by operating the control unit, which encourages players to operate the control unit and increases the excitement of the annihilation SP effect, which involves playing by tapping the control unit repeatedly.

(Effect 11)
As shown in Fig. 9-42 to Fig. 9-44, when the revival performance is executed, the scratched performance sound J "Fi, Fi, Fi, Fi, Fever" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the first revival display "FE" and the second revival display "FE" enlarged larger than the first revival display are alternately displayed on the image display device 5.

With this configuration, during the revival performance, the first revival display "FE" and the second revival display "FE" associated with the first performance sound J "Fi" played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed on the image display device 5, thereby realizing a performance that appeals to the player's visual and auditory senses. In addition, by switching the display size of the "FE" letters in response to the timing of the playback output of the first performance sound J "Fi", it is possible to strengthen the sense of unity between the video and audio, thereby increasing the interest of the revival performance.

(Effect 11-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-42 to FIG. 9-44, the character A is included inside the first resurrection display and the second resurrection display.

With this configuration, it is difficult to display characters with normal text information (such as the dialogue displayed in conversation preview effects in which characters converse with each other) (because the display area cannot be secured), but with text information when an effect that notifies of a jackpot, such as a revival effect, is executed (first revival display, second revival display), it is possible to display characters, thereby enhancing the special feeling of the revival effect.

(Effect 11-2)
As shown in Figures 9-42 to 9-44, the first revival display and the second revival display are composed of the letters "FE," which are the first two letters of "FEVER," indicating a "jackpot."

This configuration makes it clear that a jackpot will occur after the revival performance, allowing players to play in a proper manner without confusing them.

(Effect 11-3)
As shown in Figures 9-42 to 9-44, the first revival display and the second revival display are composed of the letters "FE" related to the scratch-processed [first performance sound J] "Fi" of the performance sound J.

This configuration can enhance the sense of unity between video and audio, making the revival more interesting.

(Effect 11-4)
As shown in Figures 9-42 to 9-44, when the revival performance is executed, the first revival display is composed of a white display color, and the second revival display is composed of a black display color which is in a complementary color contrast with white, and the revival displays of these display colors are alternately displayed twice each.

This configuration makes it possible to increase the saturation of the colors of the alternating revival displays, making them appear even more vivid, thereby increasing the interest of the revival performance.

(Effect 11-5)
As described above, in the revival performance, a first revival display, a second revival display having a larger display size than the first revival display, a third revival display having a larger display size than the second revival display, and a fourth revival display having a larger display size than the third revival display may be displayed in that order.

With this configuration, the revival display can be used to gradually build excitement in announcing that a jackpot has been hit during the revival performance, increasing the excitement of the revival performance.

This specification may or may not adopt a configuration that combines each embodiment of the present disclosure.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a player can select a song to be played from a plurality of types of songs in a jackpot game or a time-saving game when the V-stock effect is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this form. Each time a jackpot game or a time-saving game is executed, different songs may be played in a predetermined order, or songs may be played randomly. In this case, these songs do not include song X, which is a dedicated song when the V-stock effect is executed.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the player could not select a song other than song X during a jackpot game or time-saving game when the V-stock effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the player may be able to select a song other than song X during a jackpot game or time-saving game when the V-stock effect is executed.

For example, in a jackpot game or time-saving game when a V-stock effect is executed, the player can select a song other than song X, but the output volume of the selectable song may be lowered, and the visibility of the special operation prompt display BT2 (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) may be reduced.

(3) Note that in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which some elements in the consecutive hold performance (rainbow caption display TI, V stock count display VNI, music X) are common to the first consecutive hold performance and the second consecutive hold performance. However, this is not limited to this form, and all elements in the consecutive hold performance may be common to the first consecutive hold performance and the second consecutive hold performance.

In addition, in the above example, some elements of the consecutive hold performance executed using the image display device 5 (rainbow caption display TI, V stock count display VNI) are common to the first consecutive hold performance and the second consecutive hold performance, and some elements of the consecutive hold performance executed using the speakers 8L, 8R (music X) are common to the first consecutive hold performance and the second consecutive hold performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and some elements of the consecutive hold performance executed using the first performance device (e.g., image display device 5) may be common to the first consecutive hold performance and the second consecutive hold performance, and some elements of the consecutive hold performance executed using the second performance device (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) may not be common to the first consecutive hold performance and the second consecutive hold performance.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which "ROUND" was used as the unit of round display, but this is not limited to the above, and a unit other than "ROUND" may be used as the unit of round display.

For example, the unit of round display may be a unit such as "round" which is related to the fact that it is a jackpot round, or it may be a unit such as "Dream Dream" or "Powerful" which is not related to the fact that it is a jackpot round.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of V stocks (number of consecutive reserved stocks) is notified in the V stock presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the number of V stocks (number of consecutive reserved stocks) does not have to be notified in the V stock presentation.

For example, if the number of V stocks (number of consecutive reserved stocks) is not announced in a V stock performance, the player will not know how many "wins" will occur in the reserved memory even though the V stock performance has been executed. This gives the player a sense of security that the V stock performance has been executed, while also increasing the player's interest in the unknown number of V stocks, thereby improving the excitement of the performance after the V stock performance.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of V stocks (number of consecutive reserved items) is notified by operating the operation unit once in the V stock presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the number of V stocks (number of consecutive reserved items) may be notified by other methods in the V stock presentation.

For example, it is possible to execute a V stock number notification effect that notifies the number of V stocks, and in this V stock number notification effect, the number of V stocks may be notified by executing a mini-game that requires operating the operation unit multiple times or more.

(7) In the above embodiment, the V stock number display in the V stock presentation shows an example in which the number of V stocks is suggested, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the V stock number display in the V stock presentation may show an element other than the number of V stocks.

For example, the V stock number display in the V stock presentation can be displayed with an effect display around the V stock number display. Depending on the display color of this effect display, the type of jackpot of the "hit" that is the target of the V stock may be suggested. If the effect display of the V stock number display is rainbow colored, it suggests a "10R jackpot A", if the effect display of the V stock number display is red, it suggests a "10R jackpot A" or a "10R jackpot B", and if the effect display of the V stock number display is blue, it suggests a "3R jackpot B", "10R jackpot A" or a "10R jackpot B".

(8) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which scratch processing was performed by continuously playing and outputting the first audio data out of the first audio data and the second audio data that constitute the audio. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. Audio data in which the audio content that has been scratched is recorded may be stored in advance in a storage area for playing back sound data, and this audio data may be played and output.

For example, one piece of song data with the opening part of the song scratched out as "We, we, we, we, we, welcome lucky (omitted)" may be stored in advance as [Song Data X] for song X, and this song data may be played back.

(9) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the special operation prompting display BT2 is not displayed on the image display device 5 when the first V stock effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this form. It is also possible to prevent the image display device 5 from displaying an effect image different from the special operation prompting display BT2 when the first V stock effect is being executed.

For example, if a light intensity display for adjusting the screen light intensity and a volume display for adjusting the volume value can be displayed in a specified area of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 is caused to display the light intensity display and the volume display when the first V stock performance is not being executed, but is not caused to display the light intensity display and the volume display when the first V stock performance is being executed.

(10) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a song can be selected from song A, song B, and song C in any situation when the V-stock effect is not being executed during a jackpot game or a time-saving game. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the selectable songs may be different depending on the situation when the V-stock effect is not being executed during a jackpot game or a time-saving game.

For example, the number of selectable songs may increase by one each time the number of consecutive jackpots increases by one. Also, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches 10, all songs may be unlocked so that they can be selected.

(11) In the above embodiment, when the first V stock effect is executed during the jackpot RD period, an example is shown in which the first V stock effect starts in the second round of the jackpot round game ("ROUND 3" in the round display). However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and when the first V stock effect is executed during the jackpot RD period, the first V stock effect may start at a timing other than the second round of the jackpot round game.

For example, if the first V stock effect is executed during the jackpot RD period, a lottery may be held in advance to determine in which round of the jackpot round play, from rounds 1 to 10, the first V stock effect will start, and the first V stock effect may start in the round corresponding to the lottery result.

(12) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which text information related to the effect sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R was displayed on the image display device 5 when the first V stock effect was executed, but the present invention is not limited to this form. When the first V stock effect is executed, information other than text information related to the effect sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R may be displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, when the first V stock effect is executed, character A may be displayed on the image display device 5 as information related to the effect sound that is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(13) Note that in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which selection/changing of music was restricted during jackpot play or time-saving play after the first V stock performance was executed, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and it may be possible to select/change music during jackpot play or time-saving play after the first V stock performance is executed.

For example, during a jackpot game or time-saving game after the first V stock effect has been executed, the song may be selected/changed from among song A, song B, song C, and song X.

(14) In the above embodiment, when the first V stock effect is executed, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound A to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 100%, while the channel setting ratio of the music X to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to 20%, but this is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, when the first V stock effect is executed, the channel setting ratio of the effect sound A played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R may be set to 100%, while the channel setting ratio of the music X played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R may be set to 0% (mute processing).

(15) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the type of reserved memory jackpot that is the target of V-stock is suggested depending on the type of sound effect of the performance sound A. The type of sound effect here may be [sound effect A1] and [sound effect A2] with different playback output periods (for example, [sound effect A1]: 3S, [sound effect A2]: 1S), or [sound effect A1] and [sound effect A2] with different playback output contents (for example, [sound effect A1]: "(beep)", [sound effect A2]: "(cue)").

(16) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the performance sound B that is played back and output in the CU performance does not include dialogue sounds and is composed only of sound effects, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the performance sound B may also include dialogue sounds.

For example, sound effect B may be composed of [dialogue sound B] and [sound effect B]. However, when a CU performance is executed, sound effect B is played back without being scratched.

(17) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the sound effect C2 played and output in the second normal time jackpot notification effect is composed of a dialogue sound and a sound effect, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the sound effect C2 may be composed of a sound effect other than a dialogue sound and a sound effect.

For example, the sound effects C2 may include background music as well as dialogue and sound effects. In this case, the sound effects C2 may include at least one of the dialogue, sound effects, and background music as a component, or may not include any of the dialogue, sound effects, and background music as a component.

(18) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, when the sound effect C2 is played, the [first sound effect C2] "Vi" is scratched and played four times in succession, and then the [first sound effect C2] and the [second sound effect C2] "Victory" are played. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. When the sound effect C2 is played, the [first sound effect C2] "Vi" may be scratched and played four times in succession, and then the [second sound effect C2] "Victory" may be played. In this case, when the second normal time jackpot notification effect is executed, "Vi, Vi, Vi, Vi, Victory" is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(19) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the sound effect I1 when the operation prompt display BT is displayed before the second normal time jackpot notification display is executed is not scratch processed, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the sound effect I1 when the operation prompt display BT is displayed before the second normal time jackpot notification display is executed may be scratch processed.

(20) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the right-hit jackpot notification sound was composed of a dialogue sound and a sound effect, but this is not limited to the above, and the right-hit jackpot notification sound does not have to be composed of a dialogue sound and a sound effect. For example, the right-hit jackpot notification sound may be composed of only a dialogue sound, or may be composed of only a sound effect.

(21) In the above embodiment, at the timing of the winning branch during the super reach performance, a normal jackpot notification sound or a right-hit jackpot notification sound is provided as the jackpot notification sound, and a sudden jackpot notification sound is provided as the jackpot notification sound when the fluctuation starts or when a reach is established. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and a jackpot notification sound different from the above jackpot notification sounds may be provided.

For example, after the normal jackpot notification sound or the right-hit jackpot notification sound is played and output, and the display result is notified that it is a "jackpot", and at the timing when the decorative pattern that results in a "jackpot" is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a pattern jackpot notification sound may be provided that uses the decorative pattern to notify that the display result is a "jackpot".

(22) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a scratch-processed effect sound was played and output in a change precursor effect that suggests whether or not a special change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes will be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and a scratch-processed effect sound may be played and output in a change precursor effect that suggests whether or not an effect in which information different from the active display changes will be executed.

For example, it is possible to execute a background change effect in which the background image, which is information related to the variable display, changes. In the background change effect, the background image is changed from the normal background image to the first background image or the second background image. The expectation of a jackpot is set in the relationship normal background image < first background image < second background image. In the change precursor effect that indicates whether or not this background change effect will be executed, a scratch-processed effect sound may be played and output.

(23) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the word "READY" and the word "GO" were displayed when the change precursor effect: success pattern was executed, indicating that a special change effect will start. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and information other than the word "READY" or the word "GO" may be displayed when the change precursor effect: success pattern is executed.

For example, when a change precursor effect: successful pattern is executed, the words "Ready, set, go!" and "Go!" may be displayed to indicate that a special change effect will begin.

(24) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a time-saving entry effect was executed to notify the player that control was being made to a time-saving state (rush mode). However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and an entry effect may be executed to notify the player that control is being made to a state other than the time-saving state.

For example, a big win entry display may be executed to notify the player that the game state will be controlled to a big win, or a small win entry display may be executed to notify the player that the game state will be controlled to a small win.

For example, when the jackpot entry effect is executed, a jackpot explanatory image is displayed on the image display device 5. The jackpot explanatory image is an image that includes information explaining how to play during a jackpot ("Keep hitting to the right until the final bonus round is over!"), a demo icon that indicates to the player that the player is not currently in a jackpot game state and that there is no need to operate the ball-hitting control handle 30, and character A. At this time, sound effect F is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the third countdown image CDI3 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the sound effect F [first sound effect F3] "three" is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the second countdown image CDI2 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the sound effect F [first sound effect F2] "two" is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the first countdown image CDI1 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the sound effect F [first sound effect F1] "One" is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the start image JSI is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the performance sound F [second performance sound F (scratch: 4 times)] and [second performance sound F and third performance sound F] "s, s, s, s, s, start" are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the slot machine, a start effect may be executed to notify the player that control is being given to a bonus (big bonus, regular bonus, pseudo bonus, etc.), RT, AT, ART, CZ, etc. In these start effects, a scratch effect sound may be played and output.

(25) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the "START" letters on the image display device 5 matched with the scratched [second sound effect F] and [third sound effect F] "START" sound from the speakers 8L and 8R during the time-saving entry performance, but this is not limited to the above, and the "START" letters on the image display device 5 do not have to match with the sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R during the time-saving entry performance.

For example, in the time-saving entry effect, when the word "START" is displayed on the image display device 5, the sound effects "Let's go!", "Go!", or "Fire!" may be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. These sound effects may then be scratched and played and output.

(26) In the above embodiment, the start image is an image including a right-pointing arrow object, but the start image is not limited to this form and may be an image including an image other than a right-pointing arrow object. For example, the start image may be an image including an effect display or a character. If the start image includes an effect display, the effect display may be gold to enhance the fact that right-hand play is about to begin. Also, if the start image includes a character, the character may be in a state of pointing to the right to suggest that right-hand play is about to begin.

(27) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the time-saving entry effect was executed during the jackpot ED period in the jackpot game state, but the invention is not limited to this form, and the time-saving entry effect may be executed at a timing other than the jackpot ED period in the jackpot game state. For example, the time-saving entry effect may be executed during the jackpot RD period in the jackpot game state, and the time-saving entry effect is executed in the final round of the jackpot round game. In this case, an effect for selecting the presentation mode in the rush mode may be executed in the round one round before the final round of the jackpot round game.

(28) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the time-saving entry effect was always executed during the jackpot ED period in the jackpot game state, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the time-saving entry effect does not necessarily have to be executed during the jackpot ED period in the jackpot game state.

For example, the time-saving entry effect may be achieved by displaying an operation prompt display for selecting whether or not to execute the time-saving entry effect during the jackpot ED period in the jackpot game state, and the time-saving entry effect may be executed when this operation prompt display is operated.

(29) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the scratch-processed sound produced during normal jackpot notification is played back for a longer period than the dialogue sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the scratch-processed sound produced during normal jackpot notification may be played back for a longer period than the dialogue sound.

(30) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the character that mainly appears in the Super Reach performance matches the character in the character voice of the performance sound when the operation prompt display is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the character that mainly appears in the Super Reach performance does not have to match the character in the character voice of the performance sound when the operation prompt display is displayed. For example, if the character that mainly appears in the Super Reach performance does not match the character in the character voice of the performance sound when the operation prompt display is displayed, a configuration in which a jackpot is confirmed may be adopted as a contradictory performance.

(31) In the above embodiment, an example was given in which the player repeatedly taps the operation unit to perform a pseudo scratch process at any timing and play/output the effect sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. The player may operate the operation unit in a different operating method from rapid tapping to perform a pseudo scratch process at any timing and play/output the effect sound. For example, the effect sound may be pseudo scratched and played/output by pressing and holding the operation unit.

(32) Note that in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which character A was displayed inside the revival display (first revival display, second revival display) in the revival performance, but this is not limited to the above, and an image different from character A may be displayed inside the revival display in the revival performance.

For example, a character other than character A may be displayed inside the revival display during the revival performance. In this case, a premium character unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a character that mainly appeared in the super reach in question is displayed.

(33) In the above embodiment, the first revival display and the second revival display are configured with characters related to the word "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot", but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the first revival display and the second revival display may be configured with information other than the word "FEVER" indicating a "jackpot".

For example, it could be the word "BONUS" or "Blessing" to indicate a big win, the word "NEXT" or "Chain" to indicate that V is being stocked, or the word "CHALLENGE" or "BATTLE" to indicate that a specific SP will develop.

It may also be information that is not related to the subsequent effects or game state. For example, even if a jackpot occurs after the revival effect, the word "dream" or "dream" may be displayed, which is not related to the fact that it is a jackpot.

(34) In the above embodiment, the first revival display and the second revival display are shown as being composed of a part of the letters "FEVER" indicating a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the first revival display and the second revival display may be composed of the entire letters "FEVER" indicating a jackpot.

(35) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the first revival display is configured with a white display color and the second revival display is configured with a black display color that is in a complementary color contrast relationship with white, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the display color of the first revival display and the display color of the second revival display do not have to be in a complementary color contrast relationship in the revival performance.

(36) In the above embodiment, the gaming machine is equipped with (i) a [Type 1 jackpot] that controls the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display becoming a "jackpot", and (ii) a [Type 2 jackpot] that controls the gaming state to a small jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display becoming a "small jackpot" so that the gaming medium can enter the V winning area in the V winning device, and controls the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state based on the gaming medium entering the V winning area. That is, the gaming machine in the above embodiment is an example of a [Type 1 + Type 2 mixed machine] that has the patterns of [Type 1 jackpot] and [Type 2 jackpot] as the pattern for controlling the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state (i + ii), but is not limited to this form, and the various presentations shown in the above embodiment may be applied to gaming machines with different playability.

(36-1) For example, the effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine having the gameplay characteristics of a [V-ST machine]. A [V-ST machine] is a gaming machine having gameplay characteristics in which a gaming ball enters a variable V winning ball device (V lid) (described later) in the first round of a jackpot game state, and then enters a V winning hole, whereby a variable probability control (described later) is executed over a maximum of 70 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game.

The game states are a "normal state" which is a low probability state and a non-time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as "probability variable control is not executed (game state)" as appropriate), and a "probability variable state" which is a high probability state and a time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as "probability variable control is executed (game state)" as appropriate). For example, the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is set to 1/319.7, and the probability of a jackpot in the probability variable state is set to 1/40.

In a [V-ST machine], the special chance state continues until one of the following ending conditions is met first: a specified number of special games (e.g., 70 times) have been played, or the next big win game state has begun.

In addition, there will be two types of jackpots: a "normal jackpot" where the special jackpot control is not executed, and a "special jackpot" where the special jackpot control is executed.

The large prize opening is also provided with a variable V ball entry device (V lid). The mechanism of the variable V ball entry device is the same as that of the V-determining prize device 87, so a description is omitted. The open state of the variable V ball entry device (V lid) includes a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. In a "normal jackpot", the variable V ball entry device is in a short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and in a "probable jackpot", the variable V ball entry device is in a long open state in the first round of the jackpot game state. For example, a "normal jackpot" includes a "3R normal jackpot" with three rounds.

The jackpot game state resulting from a "normal jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the jackpot entry port to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first to third rounds. Also, in a "normal jackpot", the variable V entry ball device is in a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the V entry port, and it is not expected that the special bonus control will be executed, so this is essentially a "normal jackpot".

The jackpot game state resulting from a "probable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that changes the jackpot opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first to third/tenth rounds. In addition, in a "probable jackpot", the variable V winning ball device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V winning opening, and it is expected that probable control will be executed, making it a virtual probable jackpot. For example, there are "probable jackpots" with three rounds, called "3R probable jackpots", and "10R probable jackpots" with ten rounds.

When a jackpot occurs based on the display of the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that it will be determined to be a "3R regular jackpot" and a 50% chance that it will be a "3R time-limited jackpot." Also, when a jackpot occurs based on the display of the second special symbol, there is a 100% chance that it will be determined to be a "10R guaranteed jackpot."

In such a V-ST gaming machine, the various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(36-2) The effects shown in the above embodiment may also be applied to a gaming machine having the gameplay characteristics of a [V-variable probability machine]. In a [V-variable probability machine], a normal state, which is a low probability state, and a variable probability state, which is a high probability state (a gaming state in which variable probability control is executed), are provided. As jackpot types, a "normal jackpot" in which variable probability control is not executed, and a "variable probability jackpot" in which variable probability control is executed are provided. A [V-variable probability machine] is a gaming machine having gameplay characteristics in which variable probability control is executed over the period from the end of a jackpot game until the occurrence of the next jackpot by a game ball entering the aforementioned variable V winning ball device (V lid) in the first round of the jackpot game state, and then entering the V winning port.

When a jackpot occurs based on the display of the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that it will be determined to be a "3R regular jackpot" and a 50% chance that it will be a "3R time-limited jackpot." Also, when a jackpot occurs based on the display of the second special symbol, there is a 20% chance that it will be determined to be a "10R regular jackpot" and an 80% chance that it will be determined to be a "10R special jackpot."

In such a [V-variable machine] gaming machine, the various effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied.

(37) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the rate at which the final display state of the active display changes to a blue state with a low probability of winning when a special change effect is executed is 0%. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the rate at which the final display state of the active display changes to a blue state with a low probability of winning when a special change effect is executed may be a rate other than 0%.

For example, when a special change effect is executed, the probability that the final display mode of the active display will change to a blue mode with a low probability of winning is set to 5%, and the probability that the final display mode of the active display will change to a red or gold mode with a high probability of winning is set to 95%. In this case, when a special change effect is executed, although there is a high probability that the final display mode of the active display will change to a red or gold mode with a high probability of winning, there is also a possibility that the final display mode of the active display will change to a blue mode with a low probability of winning, so the special change effect can attract the player's attention even more.

The characteristic part 05TM described above includes the following components:

The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The performance control means includes:
A specific effect (story SP development effect) that suggests whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled can be executed,
When the specific performance (story SP development performance) is executed, a specific performance sound (scratch-processed performance sound G) consisting of specially processed dialogue sounds and sound effects can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
During a period in which the specific sound effect is being output, a first display (a yellow character A) and a second display (a purple character A) different from the first display can be displayed multiple times (alternately twice each) on the display means (image display device 5);
The second display is a display color obtained by inverting the display color of the first display (the display colors of character A, yellow and purple, are in a complementary color contrast relationship).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, in a specific performance, the first display and the second display color, which is the inverted display color of the first display, are each displayed multiple times in response to the output of the specific performance sound, creating a sense of unity between the sound and video in the gaming machine, and by displaying the inverted display colors multiple times, the display colors of the first display and the second display can be made to look even more vivid, thereby increasing interest when the specific performance is executed.

The gaming machine according to the second means is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display (variable display) and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A reserved storage means (RAM 102) for storing information on variable display that is not being executed as reserved storage;
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes a big win determination/small win determination at the time of starting winning) that determines whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled before the variable display is executed;
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The performance control means includes:
a first musical piece (music piece A) composed of a first singing sound and a first accompaniment sound, and a second musical piece (music piece X) which is different from the first musical piece and composed of a second singing sound and a second accompaniment sound, can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
When the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state, the first piece of music can be output from the sound output means,
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a predetermined effect (first reserved consecutive effect) can be executed based on the judgment by the judgment means, which indicates that the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory that is the subject of the judgment is controlled to the advantageous state;
the second music piece can be output from the sound output means when the predetermined effect is executed;
The first singing sound is not specially processed, whereas at least a part of the second singing sound is specially processed (the song A is played back without being scratched, whereas the song X is scratched and played back).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the second music piece is output when the predetermined performance is executed, thereby enhancing the special feeling of the predetermined performance. Furthermore, at least a portion of the second singing sound of the second music piece that is output when the predetermined performance is executed is specially processed, thereby making an impression on the player of the second music piece when the predetermined performance is executed.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display (variable display) and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A reserved storage means (RAM 102) for storing information on variable display that is not being executed as reserved storage;
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes a big win determination/small win determination at the time of starting winning) that determines whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled before the variable display is executed;
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the display between a normal state and a special state (time-saving state) in which variable display is more easily executed than in the normal state;
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The performance control means includes:
When the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state, a first piece of music (piece of music A, piece of music B, piece of music C) can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R);
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a predetermined effect (first reserved consecutive effect) can be executed based on the judgment by the judgment means, which indicates that the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory that is the subject of the judgment is controlled to the advantageous state;
When the predetermined performance is executed, a second piece of music (a piece of music X) different from the first piece of music can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
In the special state controlled after the end of the advantageous state, a special effect (a second reserved consecutive effect) can be executed based on the judgment by the judgment means, which suggests that the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory that was the subject of the judgment is controlled to the advantageous state;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the special effect (second reserved consecutive effect) is executed, the second music piece (music piece X) can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R).

With this configuration, when the predetermined performance is executed, a second piece of music different from the first piece of music is output, thereby enhancing the special feeling of the predetermined performance. In addition, when the predetermined performance and the special performance are executed, a common second piece of music is output from the advantageous state to the special state, thereby preventing a decrease in interest due to the music changing when switching from the advantageous state to the special state.

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display (variable display) and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A bonus granting means (step S05TM3070 of the performance determination process at the start of the jackpot) for granting a bonus (V stock (reserved consecutive, next consecutive));
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
a music selection means (special operation prompt display BT2) that allows a player to select at least one music piece from a plurality of types of music pieces (music piece A, music piece B, music piece C);
The performance control means includes:
When the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state, the music piece selected by the player can be output from the sound output means,
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect (first V stock effect (first reserved consecutive effect, first next confirmed effect)) that suggests that the bonus will be granted can be executed;
When the execution of the special effect is started, a special effect sound (scratch-processed effect sound A) composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect can be output from the sound output means,
During the period when the special effect sound is being output, the selection of the song by the song receiving means is restricted (the special operation prompt display BT2 is erased, and the selection of the song is not possible).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, by restricting the selection of music by the music receiving means when a special effect is being performed, it is possible to enhance the special feeling of the special effect, and to prevent a decline in interest in the special effect due to the ability to select music.

The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The performance control means includes:
A specific effect (battle SP effect) indicating whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled can be executed,
The specific performance is composed of a first part (the first half of the battle SP) and a second part (the second half of the battle SP) that is executed after the first part,
In the first part and the second part, a special effect (first half of the battle SP: CU effect, second half of the battle SP: second normal time big win notification effect) that reduces the visibility of the display means can be executed;
When the special effect is executed in the first part, a first effect sound (effect sound B) can be output from the sound output means;
When the special effect is executed in the second part, a second effect sound (effect sound C2) different from the first effect sound can be output from the sound output means;
The second sound effect is composed of specially processed dialogue sounds and sound effects (sound effect C2 is scratch processed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a common effect that reduces the visibility of the display means for the special effect of the first part and the special effect of the second part. On the other hand, by specially processing the second effect sound, it is possible to reduce the production costs of the effect and the processing burden of effect control while clearly distinguishing between the special effect of the first part and the special effect of the second part.

The gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the display between a normal state and a special state (time-saving state) in which variable display is more easily executed than in the normal state;
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The performance control means includes:
When the game is controlled to the normal state, a first notification sound (a normal-time big win notification sound (sound effect C1, sound effect C2, sound effect C3)) that notifies the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state can be output from the sound output means;
When the special state is controlled, a second notification sound (a right-hitting big win notification sound (sound effect D1, sound effect D2, sound effect D3)) that notifies the player that the special state is being controlled can be output from the sound output means,
The first notification sound is composed of a specially processed special dialogue sound and a special sound effect, while the second notification sound is composed of a specific dialogue sound and a specific sound effect that are not specially processed (the normal big win notification sound is scratch processed, while the right hit big win notification sound is not scratch processed),
The output period of the first alert sound is longer than the output period of the second alert sound (the playback output period of the right-hitting jackpot alert sound is 5.25 S, and the playback output period of the normal jackpot alert sound is 6.25 S).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the first notification sound composed of a specially processed special dialogue sound and a special sound effect is output, thereby increasing the impact when it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state when the game is controlled to the normal state. In addition, the second notification sound composed of a specific dialogue sound and a specific sound effect that are not specially processed and has a shorter output period than the first notification sound is output, thereby preventing a decrease in the sense of speed and exhilaration of the time-saving state.

The gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display (variable display) and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The performance control means includes:
A specific display (a reserved display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means,
A specific effect (change effect) that suggests whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed depending on the display mode of the specific display,
The specific display includes a first aspect (normal aspect, blue aspect) of the specific display and a second aspect (red aspect, gold aspect) of the specific display having a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first aspect,
As the specific performance, there are a first specific performance (normal change performance) and a second specific performance (special change performance) in which the specific display of the second mode is displayed at a higher rate than the first specific performance,
The performance control means includes:
When the first specific performance is executed, a special performance sound composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect is not output from the sound output means before the first specific performance is executed (before the execution of the normal change performance, none of the performance sounds are reproduced and output),
When the second specific performance is executed, the special performance sound can be output from the sound output means before the second specific performance is executed (before the special change performance is executed, the scratch-processed performance sound EA is reproduced and output).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the output of the special effect sound can suggest that a second specific effect, which has a higher probability of being controlled to a favorable state than the first specific effect, will be executed, so the player can pay attention to whether or not the special effect sound will be output, increasing interest.

The gaming machine of the eighth means comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state, time-saving state) that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The performance control means includes:
When the control of the advantageous state is started, a specific effect (a time-saving effect) that suggests that the control of the advantageous state is started can be executed;
The specific performance is a performance in which a specific display (start image JSI) suggesting that control of the advantageous state will begin is displayed on the display means, and a specific performance sound (scratch-processed performance sound F) associated with the specific display and consisting of a specially processed specific dialogue sound and a sound effect is output from the sound output means.

With this configuration, when control of an advantageous state begins, a specially processed specific sound effect is output, making it possible to properly notify the player of the timing at which control of the advantageous state begins, thereby preventing the player from being put at a disadvantage.

The gaming machine of the 9th means comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The performance control means includes:
A specific effect (story SP development effect) that suggests whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled can be executed,
When the specific performance (story SP development performance) is executed, a specific performance sound (scratch-processed performance sound G) consisting of specially processed dialogue sounds and sound effects can be output from the sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
During a period in which the specific sound effect is being output, a first display (a yellow character A) and a second display (a purple character A) different from the first display can be displayed multiple times (alternately twice each) on the display means (image display device 5);
The second display is a display color obtained by inverting the display color of the first display (the display colors of character A, yellow and purple, are in a complementary color contrast relationship).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, in a specific performance, the first display and the second display color, which is the inverted display color of the first display, are each displayed multiple times in response to the output of the specific performance sound, creating a sense of unity between the sound and video in the gaming machine, and by displaying the inverted display colors multiple times, the display colors of the first display and the second display can be made to look even more vivid, thereby increasing interest when the specific performance is executed.

The gaming machine of the means 10 includes:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The performance control means includes:
A first notification effect (first normal time big win notification effect) that notifies the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second notification effect (second normal time big win notification effect) that is a different effect from the first notification effect and that notifies the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, are executable;
When the first notification performance is executed, a first performance sound (performance sound C1) can be output from the sound output means,
When the second notification performance is executed, a second performance sound (performance sound C2) can be output from the sound output means,
The first production sound is composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect (the [first production sound C1] of the production sound C1 is composed of the first dialogue sound C1 and the first sound effect C), and the second production sound is a dialogue sound different from the dialogue sound and is composed of a specific dialogue sound that has been specially processed and the sound effect (the [first production sound C2] of the production sound C2 is composed of the first dialogue sound C2 and the first sound effect C).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, by providing the first and second notification effects as effects to notify that control has been entered into an advantageous state, it is possible to increase interest compared to a case in which only the first or second notification effect is provided. Also, by setting only the dialogue sounds separately for the first and second notification effects and sharing the sound effects, it is possible to reduce the production costs of the effects and the storage capacity required for the effects while differentiating between the first and second notification effects.

The gaming machine of means 11 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (image display device 5);
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a specific effect (revival effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the specific performance is executed, a special performance sound (scratch-processed performance sound J) composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect can be output from the sound output means,
When the special effect sound is output, a specific display (a first revival display, a second revival display) related to the dialogue sound can be displayed on the display means,
During the period in which the special effect sound is output, the specific display of a first size and the specific display of a second size larger than the first size can each be displayed multiple times on the display means (when the scratched effect sound J is reproduced and output, the first revival display and the second revival display are alternately displayed twice each on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, in a special effect, a first-size special display related to the special effect sound and a second-size special display are displayed on the display means, thereby realizing an effect that appeals to the player's visual and auditory senses. In addition, by switching the size of the special display in response to the output timing of the special effect sound, the unity of the video and audio can be strengthened, and the interest of the special effect can be increased.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means;
A performance control means capable of executing a performance,
The performance control means includes:
A specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means,
A specific effect that suggests whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed depending on the display mode of the specific display,
The specific display includes a first aspect of the specific display and a second aspect of the specific display having a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first aspect,
The specific effects include a first specific effect and a second specific effect in which the specific display of the second aspect is displayed at a higher rate than the first specific effect,
The performance control means includes:
When the first specific performance is executed, before the first specific performance is executed, a special performance sound composed of a specially processed dialogue sound and a sound effect is not output from the sound output means;
a special effect sound output means for outputting the special effect sound from the sound output means before the second specific effect is executed when the second specific effect is executed.

Images